PROJECT MANUAL PROJECT NO. OEMA-2019-145

New Culver's Restaurant Lee’s Summit, Missouri County of Jackson

OLLMANN ERNEST MARTIN ARCHITECTS 200 South State Street Belvidere, Illinois 61008 815-544-7790 Phone

PROJECT MANUAL PROJECT NO. OEMA – 2019-145

NEW CULVER’S RESTAURANT SE Oldham Parkway Lee’s Summit, MO

A SINGLE CONTRACT FOR: GENERAL WORK PLUMBING WORK FIRE PROTECTION WORK HVAC WORK ELECTRICAL WORK

OLLMANN ERNEST MARTIN ARCHITECTS 200 SOUTH STATE STREET BELVIDERE, ILLINOIS 61008

MARCH 20, 2020

SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

000101 TITLE PAGE ...... 000101 – 1 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS ...... 000110 – 1-2 000111 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE...... 000111 - 1

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS - AIA A201...... 1-40 007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS...... 007300 – 1-20

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 012300 ALTERNATES...... 012300 – 1-1 013300 SUBMITTALS ...... 013300 – 1-2 015001 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ...... 015001 – 1-5

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 023213 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS...... 023213 – 1

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ...... 033000 – 1-10

DIVISION 4 MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY...... 042000 – 1-10 047300 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER ...... 047300 – 1-7

DIVISION 5 METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS ...... 055000 – 1-7

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY ...... 061000 – 1-6 061753 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES...... 061753 – 1-2 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY...... 062000 – 1-6

DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 BUILDING INSULATION...... 072100 – 1-4 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM ...... 072400 – 1-7 075419 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM...... 075419 – 1-10 076200 SHEET METAL WORK...... 076200 – 1-7 079200 JOINT SEALANTS...... 079200 – 1-4

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL WORK...... 081113 – 1-5 081513 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS ...... 081513 – 1-3 084113 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS...... 084113 – 1-6 087100 FINISH HARDWARE ...... 087100 – 1-4 088000 GLAZING ...... 088000 – 1-8

OEMA-2019-145 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092116 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS...... 092116 – 1-6 093013 CERAMIC TILE ...... 093013 – 1-4 095113 LAY-IN CEILINGS ...... 095113 – 1-3 096518 HYBRID CARPET...... 096518 – 1-4 096724 RESINOUS FLOORING ...... 096724 – 1-8 097200 VINYL WALL COVERING...... 097200 – 1-3 099000 PAINTING ...... 099000 – 1-6

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 102112 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS ...... 102112 – 1-5 104400 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES...... 104400 – 1-2

DIVISION 11 NOT USED

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 124813 RECESSED FLOOR MATS...... 124813 – 1-2

DIVISIONS 13 - 21 NOT USED

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING ...... 220000 – 1-5

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING...... 230000 – 1-6 233113 DUCTWORK ...... 233113 – 1-3

DIVISIONS 24 & 25 NOT USED

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS...... 260000 – 1-4 260010 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE...... 260010 – 1-3 265000 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION ...... 265000 – 1-5

DIVISIONS 27 - 30 NOT USED

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 312000 EARTHWORK...... 312000 – 1-8

DIVISION 32 - 49 NOT USED

END 000110.

000110-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO SECTION 000111 – OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE

1.01. DEFINITIONS

A. INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE: Instruments of service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

1.02. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE

A. The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. Entities other than the Architect shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s reserved rights.

B. Entities other than the Architect are authorized to reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. Entities other than the Architect may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Architect.

1.03. TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM

A. Instruments of Service shall not be transmitted in digital form without the specific written consent of the Architect.

END 000111.

OEMA-2019-145 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 000111-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

Referring to page 1 of AIA Document A201-2007 the following identifications are made: 1. Project: As indicated on the Title Block of the Drawings. 2. Owner: As indicated on the Title Block of the Drawings. 3. Architect: Ollmann Ernest Martin Architects 200 South State Street Belvidere, Illinois 61008.

1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The standard American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201, “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” 2007 Edition, attached hereto, shall apply in full except for such modifications and supplementary conditions specified in this Specification Section 007300.

B. Section 1.1.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 1.1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to all technical specifications, Divisions 2 through 50.

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS A. Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 1.1.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written order or supplemental drawing for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect or Engineer.” B. In Paragraph 1.1.2 of the General Conditions, everywhere the word “Architect” occurs revise it to read “Architect or Engineer”. C. Add the following phrase to the last sentence of Paragraph 1.1.2 of the General Conditions: “… as defined in the Owner Architect Agreement.” D. Section 1.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 1.1.9 Where the word “building,” “project” or “work” occurs, it shall be construed as applying to all portions of the Work. 1.1.10 The term “General Work” shall mean the portion of the Work other than Mechanical and Electrical Work. 1.1.11 The term “Mechanical Work” shall refer to any Fire Protection, Plumbing, and Heating, Ventilating or Air Conditioning Work described by the Fire Protection, Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings and/or Divisions 21, 22 and 23 of the Specifications and includes like work specified in Division 1. 1.1.12 The term “Electrical Work” shall mean the Integrated Automation, Electrical, Communications, and Electronic Safety and Security Work described by the Integrated Automation, Electrical, Communications, and Electronic Safety and Security Drawings and/or Divisions 25, 26, 27 and 28 of the Specifications and includes like work specified in Division 1. 1.1.13 The term “General Contractor” shall mean the Contractor as defined in Article 3. The terms “General Contractor,” “Fire Protection Contractor,” “Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning Contractor,” “Electrical Contractor,” etc., may appear in the Construction Documents to help identify responsibilities associated with their respective segments of the Work.

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.1.14 The term “Engineer” shall mean an engineering professional or entity employed by the Architect, General Contractor or Owner, except as stated or clearly implied otherwise. 1.1.15 The term “provide” shall mean “furnish and install in place” except as stated otherwise. 1.1.16 The term “equal” shall mean equal in accordance with the determination of the Architect or Engineer, except as clearly indicated otherwise.

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Paragraph 1.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 1.2.1.1 Ambiguity or conflict in description of quality or quantity shall be resolved in favor of the better quality or greater quantity. 1.2.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any Section or part of the Drawings, Specifications or Conditions require him to provide regardless of whether such requirement is or is not faithfully repeated in other parts of documents thereof to which the provision might be appropriate. 1.2.1.3 In all cases where a device, material, unit, or part of equipment is referred to as singular in number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the work referenced. 1.2.1.4 As is the custom, persons and entities appearing in the Contract Documents may be referred to as though masculine in gender, irrespective of actual gender. When the context so requires, the masculine gender includes the female and/or neuter, and a singular number includes the plural as does the plural the singular. 1.2.1.5 Where a Specifications Section contains a “Work Includes” list, the list shall merely serve as a table of contents for items described in the Section and does not necessarily set the limits of work required. 1.2.1.6 Where a material is listed only by description, ASTM, or Fed. Spec. numbers, any product meeting or exceeding requirements of such specification will be acceptable if material does not alter details shown on Drawings. If requested by Architect or Engineer, evidence shall be furnished showing that material meets requirements of the Specifications. B. Paragraph 1.2.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 1.2.3.1 Acronyms and abbreviations that have well known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.3.2 Where reference is made to a standard of a government, manufacturers' association or professional society, the pertinent sections of the latest edition (as of the time of bidding) of the referenced standard shall apply, unless otherwise specified, and shall have the same force and effect as if set forth in full.

1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE A. Delete Sections 1.5 and 1.6 of the General Conditions and refer to Specification Section 000111 “Ownership and Use of Instruments of Service”.

2.1 GENERAL (ARTICLE 2 - OWNER) A. In the third sentence of Paragraph 2.1.1 of the General Conditions delete the following phrase: “Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 4.2.1,”

2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK A. Delete the third sentence of Section 2.4 of the General Conditions.

007300-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Section 2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 2.4.1 The reasonable cost to be deducted for correcting such deficiencies may also include costs for testing, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys’ fees and expenses. 2.4.2 The Owner’s actions pursuant to this paragraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a Surety upon its Performance and Payment Bonds.

3.1 GENERAL (ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR) A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.1.3 of the General Conditions revise as follows: Delete the phrase “in the Architect’s” and replace with “or Engineer in the…”.

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. Revise Paragraph 3.2.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 3.2.1 By executing the Agreement, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site and has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, including those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads, the character, quality and quantity of surface and sub-surface materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the work and all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information concerning these conditions will not relieve him from any obligation with respect to his Contract. B. Revise the second sentence Paragraph 3.2.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect and Engineer any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information.” C. Revise Paragraph 3.2.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect and Engineer any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information.” D. In Paragraph 3.2.4 of the General Conditions, everywhere the word “Architect” occurs revise it to read “Architect or Engineer”. E. Paragraph 3.2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following to the last sentence: “…, unless the Contractor recognized or should have recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and failed to report it to the Architect, Engineer and Owner.” F. Section 3.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.2.5 The Contractor shall advise the Architect and Engineer of any condition in the Contract Documents that might affect a product’s warranty.

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Revise Paragraph 3.4.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows:

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO “Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect or Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 3.12.8 or Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation and in accordance with a Change Order.” B. Subparagraph 3.4.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.4.2.1 After award of the Contract, substitutions initiated by the Contractor will not be considered except under one or more of the following conditions: .1 Required for compliance with subsequent interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. .2 Unavailability of specified products, through no fault of the Contractor. .3 Subsequent information discloses inability of specified products to perform properly or to fit in designated space. .4 When it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect, Engineer or Owner, that a substitution would be substantially to the Owner’s best interests, in terms of cost, time or other considerations. 3.4.2.2 By submitting a substitution, Contractor assumes responsibility for any changes or modifications required in the construction directly related to the substitution as well as in any other items of work affected by such substitution, including warranties, irrespective of acceptance of the substitution. 3.4.2.3 Where materials are listed by manufacturer and trade name/model number with no qualifying statement, Contractor shall provide the product/material indicated. Where listed product/material is followed by a phrase allowing equal or comparable materials of other manufacturers, products/materials complying with or exceeding the specifications for the named item, as appropriate to the intended use, may be submitted for approval. C. Paragraph 3.4.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.4.3.1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to enforce among all workers directly or indirectly employed by him, all rules that Owner may establish for conduct of workers on premises. D. Section 3.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.4.4 Quality of Materials: Unless specifically called for otherwise, all equipment, materials and articles incorporated in the Work are to be of the best grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. 3.4.5 Domestic vs. Foreign Sources of Materials: In order that ready availability of materials, parts, or components for repair, replacement or expansion may be assured, all materials, parts and components shall be obtained where feasible from sources which maintain a regular domestic stock. Foreign produced materials and components shall be used only with Owner’s prior written approval. 3.4.6 Acceptance of Materials: Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to ordering material and equipment, Contractor shall submit in quadruplicate to Owner a listing of which manufacturers and materials the Contractor intends to incorporate into the Work. When requested, he shall also submit related performance capacities, samples and other pertinent information. Machinery or equipment, materials and articles installed or used without such review shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. 3.4.7 Quality of Workmanship: Unless specifically called for otherwise, all workmanship incorporated in the Work is to be of the best grade appropriate to its kind for the purpose. 3.4.8 Work shall be performed by trained experienced personnel, skilled in their various crafts, under supervision of an approved foreman.

007300-4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.4.9 Anchors and/or Fasteners: Anchoring of any component by way of fibrous braid, plastic or other non-metallic expansion shields will not be permitted.

3.5 WARRANTY A. In the first sentence of Section 3.5 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and Architect”. B. Revise the last sentence of Section 3.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “If requested, by the Architect, Engineer or Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.”

3.6 TAXES A. Section 3.6 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.6.1 Contractor shall also pay unemployment and social security taxes as well as other taxes imposed by local, city, state or federal government. If the tax laws are subsequently amended by legislation during the term of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the net change caused by such amendment.

3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS A. Revise Paragraph 3.7.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner, Architect and Engineer before conditions are further disturbed.

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT A. The first sentence of Paragraph 3.9.1 of the General Conditions is revised to read as follows: “The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance as required at the Project Site until all punch list items have been accepted by the Owner.” B. Paragraph 3.9.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.9.1.1 The Superintendent employed shall be subject to the Owner’s approval. Upon Owner’s request, Contractor shall submit for review a written summary of the Superintendent’s experience and qualifications. C. Paragraph 3.9.2 of the General Conditions shall be revised to read as follows: 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner, if requested by the Owner, the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Owner may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Owner requires additional time to review. Failure of the Owner to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. D. In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.9.3 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.

3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.10.1 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and Architect”.

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Paragraph 3.10.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.10.1.1 Upon award of the Contract, the General Contractor shall develop a horizontal bar type Construction Schedule for the work and make copies for Owner and Subcontractors. 3.10.1.2 The Construction Schedule shall be determined following consultation with the General Contractor and Owner’s Contractors under Separate Contract and their estimates of time required to complete their Work. C. Delete Paragraph 3.10.2 of the General Conditions. D. In Paragraph 3.10.3 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and Architect”.

3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE A. Revise the last sentence of Section 3.11 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “These shall be available to the Owner, in addition to any additional documents required to be on the site by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record to the Work as constructed.” B. Section 3.11 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.11.1 Only Drawings, Specifications and Submittals reflecting the latest changes shall be used at the site to construct the Work.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Revise the last two sentences of Paragraph 3.12.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the reviewer without action.” B. Revise Paragraph 3.12.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows: The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents and approve Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. C. In Paragraph 3.12.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”. D. In Paragraph 3.12.7 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “by the Architect”. E. Revise Paragraph 3.12.8 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owner, Architect and Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Owner, Architect or Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s or Engineer’s review thereof.” F. In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.12.9 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “by the Architect”. G. In the last sentence of Paragraph 3.12.9 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect’s”. H. In the fifth sentence of Paragraph 3.12.10 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “to the Architect”. I. In the seventh sentence of Paragraph 3.12.10 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “reviewer”.

007300-6 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO J. Section 3.12 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.12.11 Only Shop Drawings that have been reviewed by General Contractor shall be used at the job site and all copies shall bear the stamp of the General Contractor.

3.18 INDEMNIFICATION A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.18.1 of General Conditions, after the phrase “Architect’s consultants,” add the word “Engineer,”. B. Section 3.18 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 3.18.3 None of the foregoing provisions shall deprive the Owner, the Architect or the Engineer of any action, right or remedy otherwise available to them or either of them at common law. 3.18.4 In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the indemnity obligations hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost of bringing any such action, including attorneys’ fees, to the party requesting indemnity.

4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Delete Paragraph 4.2.1. B. In Paragraph 4.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the first two sentences. C. In Paragraph 4.2.3 of General Conditions, delete the first sentence. D. In Paragraph 4.2.4 of General Conditions, delete the first sentence. E. Delete Paragraph 4.2.5. F. In Paragraph 4.2.6 of General Conditions, revise the first sentence to read as follows: “Regardless whether or not the Architect has been retained to perform Construction Administration functions, the Architect has the authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.” G. In Paragraph 4.2.7 of General Conditions, revise the first two sentences to read as follows: “If any submittals are reviewed by the Architect, the Architect will review and take appropriate action upon the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other similar submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time, in the Architect’s professional judgement, to permit adequate review.” H. Delete Paragraphs 4.2.8, 4.2.9 and 4.2.10 of the General Conditions. I. In Paragraph 4.2.11 of General Conditions, in the first sentence delete the phrase “performance under, the”. J. In Paragraph 4.2.13 of General Conditions, after the word “Architect’s” add the phrase “or Owner’s”.

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Revise Paragraph 5.2.1 of General Conditions, to read as follows: “The Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Owner may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner has a reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Owner requires

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO additional time for review. Failure of the Owner to reply within the 14 days period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.” B. In Paragraph 5.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”. C. In Paragraph 5.2.3 of General Conditions, in the first sentence delete the phrase “or Architect” both times it occurs. D. In Paragraph 5.2.4 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.

6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY A. In Paragraph 6.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. Subparagraph 6.2.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented as follows: 6.2.2.1 Each contractor shall perform work in proper sequence in relation to that of other contractors. Mechanical contractors and electrical contractors shall fit their conduit, piping and ductwork into the structure as job conditions may demand. Final decision as to right-of-way and run of pipes, ducts, etc., is reserved by the Owner. 6.2.2.2 Each contractor shall cooperate in every way possible to allow for installation of equipment provided by Owner or his Equipment Contractors during the course of construction. 6.2.2.3 Each contractor and subcontractor shall obtain complete data at site and inspect surfaces that are to receive his work before proceeding with his work; shall be solely responsible for accuracy of measurements and laying out of work; shall correct errors or defects due to faulty measurements taken, information obtained, layout, or due to failure to report discrepancies. Work of previous contracts found to be unacceptable to receive work of this contract shall be reported to the Owner by contractors finding such conditions prior to beginning of their work. 6.2.2.4 Each contractor shall give due notice and proper information to other contractors of any special provisions necessary for the placing and setting of his work coming in contact with work of other contractors. Failing to do so in proper time, he shall be held responsible and shall pay for any and all alterations and repairs necessitated by such neglect. 6.2.2.5 Any contractor who installs work improperly coordinated with other trades, either by way of installing work at the wrong time or the wrong items of work or work in the wrong location, shall, at his own expense, do all cutting, fitting, patching, repairing or replacement required to make his work conform to the intent of the design as shown and specified. 6.2.2.6 Each contractor shall furnish all lintels, thimbles, sleeves, hangers, etc., required for his work and not indicated to be furnished under another subcontract. Such items shall be installed in a manner and at such times as will not delay or interfere with any other building operations.

6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP A. Revise Section 6.3 of General Conditions, to read as follows: “If a dispute arises among the Contractor and separate contractors as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among these responsible.”

7.1 GENERAL (CHANGES IN THE WORK) A. In Paragraph 7.1.1 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “Construction Change Directive”. B. Revise Paragraph 7.1.2 of General Conditions, to read as follows:

007300-8 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO “A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner and the General Contractor.” C. In Paragraph 7.1.3 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “Construction Change Directive”.

7.2 CHANGE ORDERS A. Revise Paragraph 7.2.1 of General Conditions, to read as follows: “A Change Order is a written instrument signed by the Owner and the General Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following:…” B. Section 7.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 7.2.2 No contractor shall have the right to prosecute or maintain either an arbitration proceeding or a suit-at-law to recover for an extra, unless his claim is based upon a written Change Order signed by the Owner. 7.2.3 In addition to information required by the General Conditions, Change Orders shall include itemized breakdowns of labor hours and wages and of materials as well as itemized costs of related accessories, rentals and special services separated out from other costs. Breakdowns shall be organized according to Subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, material suppliers and Contractor. 7.2.4 The combined total of profit and overhead shall be limited to the percentage as stipulated in the Owner Contractor Agreement. Overhead shall include the markup related to a contractor’s indirect expenses such as main office operations, field office activities, tools and minor equipment, depreciation, as-built drawings, personnel transport, delay costs, bond premiums and liability insurance. Overhead is not to include what are frequently called “general conditions” items such as rented sheds, rented operating equipment, scaffolding, toilets, snow removal, waste removal, cleaning, permits, fees, surveying, temporary constructions, temporary enclosures, protection, and temporary heat, power and ventilation. 7.2.5 Charges for field supervision time shall not be allowed as an added expense unless the Change Order includes an extension of the Contract Time. 7.2.6 Charges for delivery of materials shall not be allowed as an added expense unless the quantity of additional material items exceeds one-half truck load.

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Delete Section 7.3 of the General Conditions.

7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Revise Section 7.4 of General Conditions, to read as follows: “The Architect and Engineer have the authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension in the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order or Supplemental Drawing from the Architect or Engineer and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.”

8.1 DEFINITIONS A. Revise Paragraph 8.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date determined by the Owner and General Contractor.

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION A. Paragraph 8.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented as follows:

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-9 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 8.2.1.1 It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between Contractor and Owner, that the date for beginning construction, rate of progress and time for completion of the work of the Contract are essential conditions of the Contract. 8.2.1.2 Work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure the substantial completion of the work within the required completion times except as otherwise established in the Contract. 8.2.1.3 Additional costs due to payment of overtime rates shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum and may not be submitted to Owner for additional payment except by prior written agreement.

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. Revise Paragraph 8.3.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner, Architect or Engineer, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Owner determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner may determine.

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. In Section 9.2 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner” each time it occurs. B. Section 9.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 9.2.1 Allowances and bond charges shall appear separately in the schedule.

9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”. C. Delete subparagraph 9.3.1.1 of the General Conditions. D. Subparagraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 9.3.1.3 As soon as possible, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an estimated draw schedule for each month, based upon the date established for completion of the project. 9.3.1.4 Contractor’s itemized labor and material breakdown shall be submitted to the Owner on Schedule of Contract Amount forms, or other form as Owner may agree to, for review and approval prior to submission of first periodic estimate for payment. 9.3.1.5 Payment requests shall be submitted in triplicate. 9.3.1.6 Beginning with the first payment request and with each subsequent payment request, the Contractor shall submit 3 notarized waivers of lien for the full amount of the payment request being submitted. Beginning with the second payment request, the Contractor shall submit 3 notarized waivers of lien from each subcontractor/supplier for whom payment was requested in the previous payment request. These waivers must be received by the Owner in order for subsequent payment to be released. E. Revise Subparagraph 9.3.2 to read as follows:

007300-10 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payment for materials and equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance. F. Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 9.3.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Payments have been previously received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, material and equipment relating to the Work.” G. Paragraph 9.3.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 9.3.3.1 All material and work paid for by partial payments shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner; but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made nor the restoration of damaged work, nor as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.

9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT A. Delete Section 9.4 of the General Conditions.

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT A. Revise Paragraph 9.5.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Owner may withhold a Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if the Work has not progressed to the point indicated or that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will notify the General Contractor in writing, within seven (7) days of receipt of Application for Payment, the Owner’s reasons for withholding Payment in whole or in part as provided in Paragraph 9.5.1. If the General Contractor and the Owner can not agree on a revised amount, the Owner will promptly issue a Payment for the amount for which the Owner believes represents the quantity of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may also withhold a Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of…” B. In Paragraph 9.5.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “certification” and insert the word “payment” each place it occurs. C. Revise Paragraph 9.5.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “If the Owner withholds Payment under 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered.”

9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Delete Paragraphs 9.6.1, 9.6.2 and 9.6.3 of the General Conditions. B. Paragraph 9.6.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-11 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 9.6.4.1 Should the Owner fail to approve an Application for Payment for a cause the Owner determines is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor, the Owner may pay such subcontractor directly; and such payment shall not be deemed to create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor or to create any rights in the subcontractor against the Owner. C. Delete Paragraph 9.6.5 of the General Conditions. D. In Paragraph 9.6.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Certificate for Payment, a”.

9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT A. Revise the first sentence of Section 9.7 of the General Conditions to read as follows: If the Owner does not pay the Contractor, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven (7) days after the date established in the Contract Documents the justified amount of Application of Payment or amount awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days’ written notice to the Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Revise the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.” B. In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. C. Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “If the Owner’s inspection discloses an item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before agreement on a date of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Owner.” D. In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. E. Revise Paragraph 9.8.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Owner and General Contractor shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof.” F. Paragraph 9.8.4 of the General Conditions is modified and supplemented by the following: 9.8.4.1 When the date of Substantial Completion is set, a time shall be fixed, not to exceed thirty (30) days, within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the final punch list. G. Revise the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Owner and General Contractor shall provide written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them when the date of Substantial Completion was set for the Work or a designated portion thereof.”

007300-12 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE A. In the third sentence of Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect”. C. Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 9.9.1.1 In addition to all other precautions required by the Contract, such as barricades, signs, warning lights, etc., to make the Work completely safe for public use, the Contractor shall provide and maintain dust-tight barriers to segregate areas occupied before Substantial Completion. Cost of barriers shall be paid by Contractor if Work is behind schedule and by Owner if Work is ahead of schedule. 9.9.1.2 The Owner moving equipment into areas of the Work will not constitute partial occupancy. D. In Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Owner, Contractor and Architect” and insert the phrase “Owner and Contractor”.

9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT A. Delete Paragraph 9.10.1 of the General Conditions. B. In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.10.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. C. Revise Paragraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for the Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner prior to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.” D. Section 9.10 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 9.10.6 The final payment will be made, including retained percentages, within 45 days after final acceptance of Work, provided that the following conditions have been met: .1 All punch lists are satisfactorily completed. .2 All required record drawings, SDS forms (delivered directly to Owner), warranties and guarantees are provided. 9.10.7 The Contractor and each of his Subcontractors shall keep an accurate, legible, certified record of all payrolls during his project and for three (3) years after acceptance of the work performed, and shall make said records available at any time to the Owner, if so requested. Such copies of payrolls shall be accompanied by proof satisfactory to the Owner that all bills for materials supplied have been duly paid and by such other data as the Owner may require. The Contractor shall not carry on his payroll employees of a subcontractor, but such employees must be carried on the payroll of the employing subcontractor.

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Subparagraph 10.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following Clauses:

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-13 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO .4 Contractor shall, likewise, protect property the Owner requires to be temporarily stored in the areas of the Work, including furniture and furnishings delivered under separate contracts let by the Owner under Section 6.1. .5 Contractor shall, likewise, protect the Owner's property in the areas of the Work, including furnishings, equipment and sundries, except items designated for disposal. B. In the last sentence of Paragraph 10.2.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”. C. Subparagraph 10.2.8 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 10.2.8.1 Whenever any employee, agent or other representative of Contractor or any Subcontractor, whose activities on or about the site arise out of the Work, shall cause or be a factor in causing any damage (including, but not limited to, breaking, burning, overheating, freezing, exposing, disconnecting, misconnecting, failing to guard or protect, and depriving of support) to the work, materials or property of a third party (including but not limited to the Owner, other contractors, subcontractors, material suppliers, delivery persons, frequenters, security holders, adjacent land owners, bodies politic, utilities, or members of the public), such Contractor or Subcontractor shall promptly proceed to remedy and correct such damage and to pay all costs, expenses, and damages involved. To the extent that such Contractor or Subcontractor shall fail to do so, he shall be accountable to the Owner, under his contract with the Owner, for all damages directly or consequential arising therefrom, whether liquidated or not, and whether certain or contingent, including, but not limited to costs of renovation, repair, replacement or relocation, vicarious liabilities, losses by delays, charges for architectural or other services, and extra costs, charges, work or materials of every description. .1 Upon determination of the identity of the responsible parties and of the extent of such damage so caused, Owner shall be entitled for its security, to withhold or deduct from payments otherwise due such contractor any sum reasonably estimated to be required to secure Owner's right to such account, until Owner shall otherwise be fully indemnified and made whole. .2 Such liability to account shall be deemed contractual, and shall arise regardless of whether or not circumstances of conventional tort are present or proven, and shall bind the sureties and indemnitors of such Contractor or Subcontractor, but .3 the Owner shall not be deemed to have waived, released, settled, or otherwise impaired its right to full account by reason of any payment, withholding, deduction, failure to withhold or deduct, or other form of claim or failure to claim; and in no event shall exercise or non-exercise of the Owner's right be deemed or implied to impose on the Owner any liability toward any other person; or to affect, except as expressly provided, the rights or liabilities of any of the parties arising independently of this provision. 10.2.8.2 Whenever the contractor or subcontractors whose activities cause any such damage cannot be specifically ascertained, or whenever the proportionate responsibility to account for the damage according to the foregoing provisions cannot be finally determined, the party to whose work the damage pertains shall proceed promptly to remedy and correct such damage as extra work. The reasonable charges for such extra work, together with the amounts of any further damages that may so arise, shall be agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor. If agreement cannot be reached, Contractor may submit this issue to arbitration. .1 The Owner may charge the aggregate sum to the respective accounts of all contractors who, directly or through subcontractors, material suppliers, or delivery persons were engaged in any activity at the site of the damage when it arose, in proportion to the gross amounts of their respective contracts.

007300-14 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO .2 Such allocated accountability shall continue as security to the Owner until a different accountability is ascertained or until Owner is otherwise fully indemnified and made whole.

10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. In the second sentence of Paragraph 10.3.2 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”. B. Revise the third and fourth sentences of Paragraph 10.3.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “The Contractor will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not he has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner. If the Contractor has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection.”

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Subparagraph 11.1.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 11.1.2.1 During the term of the Contract, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, purchase and maintain the specified insurance in companies properly licensed and satisfactory to Owner, and in amounts satisfactory to the Owner: 11.1.2.1.1 Workmen’s Compensation including Occupational Disease and Employer’s Liability Insurance: .1 State / Federal: Statutory amounts and coverage as required by Workmen’s Compensation Laws. .2 Employer’s Liability: Amount for each accident Amount for disease, policy limit Amount for disease, each employee For the above listed categories, provide insurance in amounts as directed by Owner but not less than that required by State and Federal Law. 11.1.2.1.2 Commercial General Liability: Include coverage for Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors’ Protective, Products-Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury and Broad Form Property Damage (including coverage for Explosion, Collapse and Underground hazards), shall be as follows: .1 The limits shall be: Amount for each occurrence Amount for general aggregate Amount for personal and advertising injury Amount for products - completed operations aggregate For the above listed categories, provide insurance in amounts as directed by Owner. .2 The policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this Project only. .3 The Contractual Liability insurance shall include coverage sufficient to meet the obligations in AIA Document A201 under Section 3.18. a. The insurance obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, his agents or employees arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, his agents or employees provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-15 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO b. This insurance shall be for the same limits stated for the Contractor’s other liability insurance. .4 Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of at least one (1) year, unless otherwise directed by the Owner, after the expiration of the period for correction of the Work. 11.1.2.1.3 Automobile Liability Insurance: Include coverage (owned, non-owned, leased and hired vehicles) for bodily injury and property damage - with limits not less than those stated below: Amount for each accident Provide above listed insurance in the amount as directed by Owner.

11.1.2.1.4 Umbrella or Excess Liability: with no more restrictions than primary policies. Amount over primary insurance Provide above listed insurance in the amount as directed by Owner. 11.1.2.1.5 Contractor shall carry sufficient comprehensive insurance on his equipment at site of Work and en route to and from site to fully protect him; Contractor shall require same coverage of his subcontractors. It is expressly understood and agreed that Owner and/or Architect shall have no responsibility therefor. 11.1.2.2 If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, the certificates shall be ACORD Form 25, completed and supplemented in accordance with AIA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance Form 25; and all certificates and policies shall indicate that the carrying company will not cancel without giving the Owner notice in writing thirty (30) days prior to date cancellation is to become effective. 11.1.2.3 Contractor shall protect himself by requiring his subcontractors to maintain workmen’s compensation insurance and insurance of the same kind in amounts specified above. B. The second sentence of Paragraph 11.1.3 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: These certificates and the insurance policies required by Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled, changed or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner.

11.3 PROPERTY (BUILDER'S RISK) INSURANCE A. The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.1 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. B. Paragraph 11.3.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following at the end of the paragraph: If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to purchase and maintain such insurance without so notifying the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs attributable thereto. C. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.1.2. D. Modify Subparagraph 11.3.1.3 to read as follows: 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.

007300-16 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Add Subparagraphs 11.3.1.6 and 11.3.1.7: 11.3.1.6 A copy of the insurance certificate for this coverage will be furnished to the Owner upon purchase of the policy by the Contractor. Any additional details about the policy’s provisions will be promptly furnished by the Contractor upon written request. 11.3.1.7 At the Contractor’s option and expense, he may carry insurance not included under Property Insurance for coverage on equipment and materials that are in his possession for this project. See Article REPLACEMENT OF BROKEN GLASS in Specifications Section 015001 “Special Requirements”. F. Delete Paragraphs 11.3.4 and 11.3.5. G. The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.6 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. H. The last sentence of Paragraph 11.3.6 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. I. Delete Paragraph 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION and insert the following: 11.3.7 Neither the Owner nor its insurance company waive any rights of subrogation. J. The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.8 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: “A loss insured under this property insurance shall be adjusted by the Contractor as fiduciary and made payable to the Contractor as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Paragraph 11.1.10.” K. The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.9 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: “If required in writing by a party in interest, the Contractor as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Contractor’s duties.” L. The third sentence of Paragraph 11.3.9 of the General Conditions is revised as follows: “The Contractor shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Contractor shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.” M. Revise Paragraph 11.3.10 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 11.3.10 The Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Contractor’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Contractor as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the direction of the arbitrators.”

11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND A. Delete Paragraph 11.4.1 of the General Conditions and replace with the following: 11.4.1 If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish through a surety company both Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds each in the amount not less than the full amount of his Contract as security for the duration of the Contract and for 12 months after date of acceptance of the Work.

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-17 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Paragraph 11.4.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 11.4.1.1 Premium for bonds shall be paid for by Contractor. Surety Company shall use the American Institute of Architects Form A-312. The surety company must have a Best rating of “B” or better, must be licensed to do business in the state in which the project resides and must be acceptable to Owner. The bond form shall incorporate by reference all the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions. 11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK A. In Paragraph 12.1.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect’s” and insert the word “Owner’s” and delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. In Paragraph 12.1.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”.

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 12.2.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. Paragraph 12.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 12.2.1.1 Approval of any material or work at any stage of construction will not prevent its subsequent rejection for cause. 12.2.1.2 No election by the Owner to correct work shall constitute a waiver of any obligation of a surety upon its Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds. C. In the last sentence of Subparagraph 12.2.2.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “or Architect”.

13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. In the third sentence of Paragraph 13.5.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”. B. Paragraph 13.5.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 13.5.1.1 The testing and inspection agencies will be hired by the Owner except as specified otherwise in the Contract Documents. 13.5.1.2 The Contractor shall prepare a testing schedule indicating the types of tests required by the Contract Documents and the times at which the tests need to be performed so as not to delay the Work. The Contractor shall update the schedule as necessary and shall deliver copies to the Owner, Architect and the testing/inspection agencies. 13.5.1.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with testing/inspection agencies in all regards. C. Revise Paragraph 13.5.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “If the Design Professional of Record , Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Paragraph 13.5.1, the Design Professional of Record will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Design Professional of Record and Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Design Professional of Record and Owner may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Paragraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.” D. In Paragraph 13.5.4 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”.

007300-18 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. In Paragraph 13.5.5 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”.

13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY A. The General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following sub-article 3.8: 13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY 13.8.1 Policies of Employment to be Maintained by Contractor 13.8.1.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable provisions of all federal and state laws which prohibit discrimination in employment on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, marital status, national origin, ancestry, age, and physical or mental handicap and all rules and regulation promulgated and adopted pursuant thereto. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. 13.8.1.2 The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. 13.8.1.3 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applications will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, marital status, national origin, ancestry, age, and physical or mental handicap.

14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR B. Revise Subparagraph 14.1.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 14.1.1.3 Because the Owner has not made payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents, and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5.1; or C. In Paragraph 14.1.3 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”. D. In Paragraph 14.1.4 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and the Architect”.

15.0 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. In the first sentence of Paragraph 15.1.2 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.” B. Revise the last sentence of Paragraph 15.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows: “Change Orders shall be prepared and Payments shall be issued in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.” C. Paragraph 15.1.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 15.1.3.1 Nothing in the requirements of this Paragraph shall require the Owner to pay to the Contractor any sum for work that is under a disputed Claim that has yet to be resolved, until final resolution of the disputed Claim. D. Paragraph 15.1.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 15.1.4.1 Should the Contractor believe he has been delayed or damaged by another contractor hired by the Owner for work not in the Contractor’s Contract, the Contractor shall, as an intended third party beneficiary of all other prime contracts, have the right to maintain legal action against such other contractors, but shall not have the right to maintain legal action against the Owner except when the Owner is the proximate cause of the claim. E. Revise the first and second sentences of Paragraph 15.2.1 to read as follows:

OEMA-2019-145 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-19 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO “Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 and 10.4, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The identity of the Initial Decision Maker shall be indicated in the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and shall not be the Architect unless previously agreed to between Owner and Architect.” F. Paragraph 15.2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following: 15.2.4.1 Failure to comply with the Initial Decision Maker’s requests, as stated, shall be considered a waiver of the Claim. G. In the second sentence of Paragraph 15.2.5 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,” and insert “and the Design Professional(s) of Record”.

END 007300.

007300-20 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

1. GENERAL 1.01. SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.02. DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.03. PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate the costs of related coordination, revision or adjustment to related Work affected by alternate.

2. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3. EXECUTION 3.01. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Omit steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade from Base Bid. Provide in its place, fiber reinforcement for slabs-on-grade.

END 012300.

OEMA-2019-145 ALTERNATES 012300-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

1. GENERAL A. Contractor shall: 1. Review each submittal. a. Verify field dimensions. b. Verify compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Stamp submittals, certifying his review. 3. When requested, transmit reviewed submittals to Architect and Culver’s Franchising System Incorporated (CFSI) by way of the agreed transmittal form.

2. SUBMITTALS SPECIFIED IN CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner all of the items required to be submitted under the Conditions of Contract, as supplemented, including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Certificates of Insurance. 2. Performance Bond and Payment Bond, if any. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Name of safety officer (if not superintendent). 5. Partial & Final Waivers.

3. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Shop Drawings of all fabricated work shall be prepared by the fabricator and submitted to the General Contractor for review. All Shop Drawings shall bear verification of Subcontractor’s review and approval prior to submittal. No work shall be fabricated by order of the Subcontractor, save at his own risk, until review of Shop Drawings has been completed by the General Contractor. B. Submit shop drawings as electronic submittals prepared by fabricator and submitted through Contractor to Architect for review. Shop Drawings shall bear verification of Contractor’s review and approval prior to submittal. Architect will return annotated file. General Contractor shall annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. C. Components Designed by Professional Engineer: Shop drawings, design calculations, and similar items that require the professional seal of the designer shall be submitted both electronically and as “hard copies”. For “hard copies” submit four (4) “wet sealed” copies / prints, unless another amount is specified. All submittals shall be prepared by designer and submitted through Contractor to Architect for review. D. Submit product data as electronic submittal except for charts or brochures indicating color, texture, pattern, finish or other characteristics of materials that cannot be accurately transmitted electronically. Submit, for Architect’s review, five (5) paper submittals of such charts or brochures. Architect will retain two copies. E. SDS (Safety Data Sheets) submitted with Product Data will be considered as product information only and will not be accepted as being part of the SDS submittal requirements for O&M manuals. F. Corrections or changes indicated on Shop Drawings and Product Data shall not be considered as an order for extra work. G. No Shop Drawing or Product Data will be considered reviewed unless it bears stamp and signature of the General Contractor.

OEMA-2019-145 SUBMITTALS 013300-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. At termination of work, the General Contractor shall submit to the Owner 2 copies of an operation and maintenance manual presenting full details of care, maintenance and operation of mechanical equipment and other operable equipment of every nature. Manuals shall include such things as: 1. Manufacturer’s instructions for care. 2. Spare parts lists and sources of supply. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Control diagrams, etc. B. For temperature control equipment, manuals shall contain narrative of the control cycle for the control equipment as well as descriptive diagrams. C. Include a section pertaining to door hardware, which shall contain the final approved Hardware Schedule, Key Schedule and installation instruction sheets. D. The O&M manuals shall be compiled into 3–ring binders for submission to the Owner.

5. SAFETY DATA SHEETS A. Should any material be installed in the Work for which a Safety and Data Sheet (SDS) is required to be retained by the Owner under State regulations, the installing subcontractor shall submit the applicable SDS forms to the General Contractor for submission to the Owner upon completion of the Project. B. 2 SDS forms shall be submitted for each item. Only official OSHA SDS forms shall be used; copies will not be accepted. C. The General Contractor shall compile the forms and bind them into the O&M manual submitted to the Owner.

6. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The Contractor shall compile 2 copies of all guarantees and warranties and bind them into the O&M Manuals.

7. RECORD DRAWINGS A. At completion of work and prior to final payment, the General Contractor shall provide the Owner with complete, accurate, clean and legible record drawings made from a complete set of marked up Contract Drawings kept at the site, showing changes made to the Work during the course of the Contract. B. The General Contractor shall verify completeness of record drawings before submission.

END 013300.

013300-2 SUBMITTALS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 015001 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

1. JOB CONDITIONS & OPERATIONS A. The Contractor and each subcontractor and material supplier shall inform himself of the conditions relating to execution of his work. Neglect of this requirement will not be accepted as cause for additional payment and/or additional time for completion. B. Each manufactured article, material and item of equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by its manufacturer unless specified to the contrary. C. All on-site welding shall conform to the requirements and techniques of Factory Mutual Engineering Division. D. General Contractor shall enforce all rules that Owner may establish for conduct of workers on premises including the use of radios and like devices. E. No permanent structures shall be loaded with materials or equipment or otherwise loaded so as to invite damage. F. Contractor shall be responsible for providing dust control for exterior excavating and grading work, in accordance with appropriate codes and ordinances, for the duration of the project construction work.

2. GRADES, LINES & LEVELS A. General Contractor shall take measurements at site as required for the work and to locate existing utilities. General Contractor shall contact the city, the county, the Owner and all utility companies to carefully review all records of exposed, concealed and buried points of connections, as to location, size, type, depth, operating characteristics, etc. B. General Contractor shall lay out the construction and establish all lines and levels for the work as required by the Drawings and Specifications. General Contractor shall maintain proper base lines, levels, and benchmarks outside and inside the building, where necessary, for the use of all trades. C. General Contractor shall provide services of a registered surveyor to establish permanent benchmarks, to check lines and elevations and to check locations of anchor bolts and similar devices. D. Each trade shall lay out and establish all other lines and levels necessary for its work.

3. PROJECT MEETINGS A. General Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and coordinating project meetings to be held at times designated by Owner’s representative. Subcontractors, when requested, must attend these meetings. B. If the principal of a firm does not attend a project meeting, the person selected to represent the firm must be authorized to bind the company to a decision at the meeting.

4. USE OF SITE A. Space limitations: No areas outside construction limits may be used for any purpose by contractors or subcontractors. B. Contractors shall confine equipment, storage of materials, parking and operations of workmen to the limits indicated by Owner. Site storage space shall be confined to area of site. C. No signs will be permitted on the site, except for signs identifying architect’s, engineers’, contractors’ and Owner’s names, signs related to the processes necessary to accomplish the Work, signs for protection of persons and property, signs required by law and signs otherwise approved by Owner.

OEMA-2019-145 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 5. MATERIALS DELIVERY & STORAGE A. Store, place and handle the material and equipment delivered to job site so as to preclude inclusion of foreign substances or causing of discoloration therein. Pile neatly and compactly; barricade to protect public from injury. Protect materials as required to prevent damage from weather or the ground. Any temporary storage facilities required on-site shall be stormproof and raised above the ground. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in building or on site. General Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage due to storage of materials.

6. CLEANING A. General Cleaning: The General Contractor shall remove loose rubbish and debris from the building site promptly as it accumulates. The General Contractor shall perform an overall cleanup of the entire site as frequently as required, but not less frequently than each Friday afternoon. B. All dumpsters used on project site shall be covered with lids or tarps securely fastened to prevent debris from blowing away. C. Final Cleaning: General Contractor shall see to it that finished surfaces are clean and free of foreign matter upon completion of the work. 1. Pavings shall be swept clean. Glossy surfaces and stainless steel shall be polished. Equipment shall be free of spots and soil. 2. Drains, exterior and interior, shall be maintained clear of foreign matter. 3. Immediately prior to Owner occupying the project, General Contractor shall have all glass cleaned by a professional window washing concern. Work shall include removal of labels, paint spattering, excess glazing sealant, etc. Surfaces shall include mirrors, both sides of glass in windows, and doors. Mirrors shall NOT be cleaned with ammoniated products. 4. Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor and each subcontractor shall remove and dispose of all equipment and unused materials provided for his work. 5. After all outside clean-up work has been completed, interior clean-up shall be completed as follows: a. Subcontractor for plumbing work shall wash and leave fixtures free of stains and all piping, etc., free of dust. b. Subcontractor for heating work shall replace all filters with new filters if units have been used for temporary heating or cooling during construction; and clean all motors. c. Subcontractor for electrical work shall wash and clean all plates on switches and receptacles, light fixtures, etc., and shall vacuum clean insides of panels, etc. d. The General Contractor shall, after the above work has been done, completely vacuum all floors and walls, dust and clean all cabinet and wall materials as well as exposed wood, and then shall clean all glass and scrub and clean all floors.

7. PROTECTION A. The General Contractor shall: 1. Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, planking, and guard lights as necessary for protection of stored materials, curbs, sidewalks, streets and drives, the public, vendors, the Owner’s employees and the new constructions. 2. Use caution at all times to protect persons against injury resulting from job operations, equipment and materials moving onto and off the site, and standing equipment. 3. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewer, etc., encountered during excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage

015001-2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into work for new construction, or can be properly backfilled. 4. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing as required to prevent earth from caving or washing into excavation, and/or undermining existing structures until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into work for new construction, or can be properly backfilled. 5. Protect existing trees, shrubs, lawns and landscape work from damage, (except those indicated to be removed or altered) by providing guards and covering and maintaining plank covering over newly installed utility services, etc., to prevent damage by trucking or otherwise, including areas outside of grading and/or construction limits. Repair or replace existing vegetation and landscaping indicated to remain that has been damaged by construction activities. 6. Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms, or heat so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At end of each day’s work new work likely to be damaged shall be covered. Snow and ice shall be removed as necessary for safe and proper execution of work. 7. Protect building from damage at all times from rain water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and other water, by providing enclosures, pumps and other equipment of sufficient capacity and configuration.

8. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 9. Notify, in writing, the owners of property which interfere with work and arrange with them for disposition of such property. B. Any contractor or subcontractor causing damage to any of the Work of the Contract or site shall have, at his own expense, the damaged work replaced or repaired to its original condition. Property damaged outside of Owner’s property line shall be repaired in accordance with requirements of its owner or the authority having jurisdiction. C. Temporary Weather Closures: 1. General Contractor shall protect openings in exterior building enclosure with temporary weatherproof closures to exclude damage from inclement weather and to retain interior heated and/or air conditioned air. Suitable provision shall be made for air passage to permit proper drying out of building. General Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the construction or its contents due to the insufficiency of such protection. 2. Closures in designated emergency exits shall have plywood or other solid doors equipped with exit devices and exit signs as required by Code for the actual occupancy existing during the work.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

8. TEMPORARY HEAT & VENTILATION

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain heat and ventilation in enclosed construction areas throughout construction period as required to facilitate curing and drying of completed installations or to protect installed constructions from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Maintain an even temperature of at least 50°F for use of all trades. The General Contractor will be held responsible for damage to all materials and work due to improper heat and ventilation.

B. Use of gasoline-burning or other fuel oil fired space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

OEMA-2019-145 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Heating devices shall be smokeless units approved by Fire Marshall and Factory Mutual (FM) or Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each fuel burning heating unit shall be properly vented through temporary ducts as required to dissipate noxious fumes and prevent discoloration of building materials. Propane fueled heating units shall only be used as approved in writing by Owner. Each heating unit shall be provided with the normal safety devices to prevent injury to building and workmen. D. Costs of energy consumed for temporary heating shall be assumed by the General Contractor. E. Temporary heaters shall not be placed so close to permanent constructions as to discolor surfaces or cause materials to be over-dried. F. The permanent heating system shall not be used until dust-creating operations and painting are complete. Then, upon Owner's written approval for use of permanent heating system, General Contractor shall pay for all maintenance, and attendance required for operation of the permanent heating system up to the time of Substantial Completion. The permanent heating system shall not be operated without filters. Filters shall have a minimum MERV of 11. G. When the building is ready to be accepted by the Owner, the contractor for heating and ventilating work shall leave the heating system clean and in like-new condition, with new filters fitted throughout. H. Guarantee period for the permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not begin until Substantial Completion of total project. I. The General Contractor shall remove all temporary heating and ventilating equipment upon conclusion of its use.

9. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electric power service from public utility sources for general power and light as required for site security and carrying on the work of all trades. Power service shall be at least 400 amps, single phase, 120/240 volts. B. Cost of current used shall be paid by Contractor, direct to the utility company. C. In addition to lighting required for security and for safe access around the areas of construction, the General Contractor shall provide an average illumination of at least 15 foot-candles on surfaces being constructed except that where exposed finishes are being installed, the average illumination provided shall be at least 30 foot-candles of WHITE LIGHT. D. All temporary service wiring and equipment shall be installed and maintained in accordance with rules of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and the local electrical utility company. E. Remove temporary electrical facilities as rapidly as allowed by the installation of the permanent electrical work. F. Use of the permanent electrical system will be permitted for construction purposes. However, any use of the permanent electrical system before the project is accepted by the Owner, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner; and the Contractor shall replace all burned out bulbs, tubes or any other damaged elements, fixtures, receptacles, etc., and turn the entire electrical system over to the Owner whole and undamaged.

10. CONSTRUCTION WATER

A. The General Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide connections and extensions of services as required for drinking and construction operations. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. Before final acceptance, temporary connections and piping shall be removed and the source of supply restored to its original or better condition.

11. CONSTRUCTION TOILETS A. Permanent toilets shall not be used for construction toilet facilities.

015001-4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. The General Contractor shall furnish temporary hand wash and toilet facilities for the use of all personnel engaged on the Work. Commercially serviced portable chemical units shall be used unless approved otherwise. Quantity shall be sufficient for the maximum number of workers engaged for any particular day. C. Toilet facilities shall be serviced at least twice weekly, including emptying of tanks, recharging of germicidal and deodorizing solutions, and scrubbing entire interior with a germicidal solution.

12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. During construction period, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection per the requirements of jurisdictional authorities, for the construction site. The General Contractor shall also provide and maintain fire extinguishers and fire watches per the requirements of the Owner’s facilities insurance company. B. Similarly, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection for his temporary offices. In addition, each contractor who maintains an enclosed shed or trailer on the site for storage of materials, or workshop, or for the convenience of workmen, or office space, shall provide and maintain fire protection in each shed and trailer.

13. REPLACEMENT OF BROKEN GLASS

A. The General Contractor will be held responsible for glass that is damaged, broken or scratched due to the Work of this Contract and at completion of Contract shall replace such glass without charge to Owner. B. It shall be the General Contractor’s prerogative to charge cost of replaced glass to the party responsible. The Work shall be turned over to the Owner with glazing complete and in perfect condition.

14. INCIDENTAL CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching shall be closely coordinated and superintended by the General Contractor. B. Holes required by any contractor to be cut through completed construction shall be cut and patched by that contractor, except as directed otherwise by General Contractor. C. Patching of cut surfaces shall be done by the subcontractor who did the cutting except as directed otherwise by the General Contractor, using mechanics accomplished in the kind of work being patched. Repairing and refinishing of disturbed surfaces shall use materials and workmanship conforming to that of the original work, according to industry standards and the standards for similar work on the Project.

1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.

D. Do not cut and patch construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

E. Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

END 015001.

OEMA-2019-145 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 023213 - GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. The Geotechnical Investigation Report with its referenced attachments provides Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and is intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. The Report is made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but is not a warranty of existing conditions. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the Soils Engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by Soils Engineer at the time of the report. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. B. The Geotechnical Investigation Report and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. C. Soils tests have been conducted at the site of this project and a Geotechnical Investigation Report, dated February 28, 2020 has been prepared for Culver’s Restaurant of Lee’s Summit, MO by: Professional Services Industries, Inc. 1211 West Cambridge Circle Drive Kansas City, Kansas 66130 Ph: (913) 310-1600 Fax: (913) 310-1601 www.intertek.com/building D. This report and its attachments are available, from the Printer, for contractor’s information and use. Please contact: Advantage Copying & Printing 3448 State Road 23 P.O. Box 253 Dodgeville, Wisconsin 53533 Ph: (608) 935-0615 Fax: (608) 935-1767 Email: [email protected] E. The Owner does not represent that the findings are a warrant of subsurface conditions.

1.02. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Contractor shall make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary to perform the work of this project.

END 023213.

OEMA-2019-145 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS 023213-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Formwork. 2. Steel bar reinforcement. 3. Steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade (base bid). 4. Fiber reinforcement for slabs-on-grade (where offered as an alternate). 5. Concrete foundation walls and footings. 6. Reinforced interior slabs-on-grade. 7. Under-slab vapor retarder. 8. Floor screed in cooler and freezer rooms. 9. Exterior entrance platform foundations and platform slabs. 10. Embedded items, such as sleeves, anchors, ties, etc., including items furnished by other trades for embedment. 11. Preparation of concrete foundation surfaces to receive insulation. 12. Setting and filling pipe guards (bollards). 13. Concrete splashblocks. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Furnishing of anchor bolts for wood sill plates ...... Section 055000. 2. Furnishing of pipe for bollards ...... Section 055000. 3. Perimeter insulation on foundation walls ...... Section 072100. 4. Ceramic tile flooring...... Section 093013. 5. Resinous flooring...... Section 096724. 6. Fill under slabs and backfill...... Section 312000. 7. Concrete pavings and curbs...... See Civil Drawings. 8. Concrete for site utilities constructions ...... See Civil Drawings.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cooperate with other trades regarding installation of embedded items. Obtain templates, dimension, instructions, etc., from other trades or other contractors as required for setting items in concrete work. B. The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform concrete inspections and tests as hereinafter specified. C. Comply with the latest edition of each of the following: 1. “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary” (ACI 318) 2. “Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTM C 94) 3. “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” (ACI 302.1) 4. “Specification for Hot Weather Concreting” (ACI 305.1) 5. “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting” (ACI 306.1) 6. “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete” (ACI 304R) 7. “Specifications for Structural Concrete” (ACI 301) D. Inform personnel that may be working with concrete as to requirements and the availability of ACI 301. E. Provide protection during the construction period for all floor slabs, from oil, grease, stains, discoloration and other physical damage.

OEMA-2019-145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings pertaining to fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcements. 1. Comply with the ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.” 2. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangements of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. C. Test Reports: Submit 3 copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design tests including potential for alkali-silica reaction (ASR). D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on fiber reinforcement (if used), additives, curing agents, sealers, grouts, joint materials and similar pre-manufactured products. E. Certificates: Submit purchase receipt verifying grade and quantity of under-slab vapor retarder. F. Concrete Truck Delivery Tickets: Submit delivery tickets indicating: 1. Delivery date and time dispatched 2. Name and location of project 3. Name of Contractor 4. Name of ready-mixed concrete producer 5. Truck number 6. Number of cubic yards of concrete in load 7. Class of concrete 8. Cement content in bags per cubic yard of concrete 9. Type and brand name of cement 10. Names and quantities of admixtures used 11. Maximum size of aggregate 12. Amount of water added at job, if any, and who authorized the addition.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. FORM MATERIALS A. Form Facings for Unexposed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. B. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation intended for form coating which will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and which will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatments nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound. C. Form Ties: Configured so as to leave no metal closer than 1" to the surface of the concrete.

2.02. REINFORCEMENT A. Materials: 1. Bars: Deformed new billet steel meeting ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2. Tie Wire: Cold drawn steel wire meeting ASTM A 1064. 3. Reinforcement Fiber (if used): 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers, MD Graded, with a specific gravity of 0.91, containing no reprocessed olefin, meeting ASTM C 1116 requirements for Type III, Performance Level I (I5), with a residual strength of 50 psi when tested on 4 beams from a single batch. Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. “Fibermesh” by Propex Concrete Systems, Corporation. b. “Nycom” by Nycom Corp.

033000-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 5. Reinforcing Bar Holders: Galvanized or plastic coated when within 3/4" of exposed concrete surface. B. Fabrication: Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”. 1. No lapped splices for tension and compression bars unless noted on the Drawings or approved. Locate splices in temperature bars so that no more than half the bars are spliced at any point. Splices shall be lapped distances as indicated on Drawings. 2. Label bars to identify grade of steel and to facilitate placing. C. Storage: Store reinforcing steel on supports above ground.

2.03. CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: No unspecified cementitious materials or admixtures shall be allowed unless indicated by local conditions, and then only if approved by Architect prior to acceptance of mix design.

B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I for normal and Type III for high-early-strength. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C based on mix design requirements. Fly ash shall be limited to no more than 25% of the total quantity of cementitious materials in all service conditions. C. Mixing Water: Fresh, free of oil, acid, alkalis, salts, organic matter and potable. D. Aggregates: Per ASTM C 33, including freedom from potentially reactive constituents, as well as soft, thin elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated stone, plant matter, trash and lumps of frozen or partly cemented material. 1. ASR Tested: Per ASTM C 1260. Submit test results. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural hard, clean sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed rock. a. Size 57 (1-1/2" top size) for structural elements 6" or more in thickness. b. Size 67 (3/4" top size) for slabs less than 6” in thickness and all other concrete. 4. Furnish 3 copies of testing laboratory reports showing sieve analysis. E. Admixtures: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Per ASTM C 260. Use one of the following: a. “Darex AEA” by W.R. Grace b. “Sika AER” by Sika Corporation. c. “MasterAir VR 10” Master Builders Solutions by BASF. 2. Water-Reducing Admixtures: Per ASTM C 494; one of the following: a. “MasterPozzolith Series” Master Builders Solutions by BASF. b. “Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation. c. “WRDA Series” by W.R. Grace 3. Calcium Chloride: Shall NOT be used. Neither calcium chloride nor admixtures containing chloride salts shall be added to concrete.

2.04. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder:

OEMA-2019-145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. ASTM E 1745, Class A, minimum thickness of 10 mils, with a maximum permeance of 0.03 perms. Include manufacturer's recommended pressure-sensitive tape. Provide one of the following or approved comparable product: 1. “Stego Wrap Class A Vapor Retarder” by Stego Industries LLC. 2. “Perminator (10 mil)” by W.R. Meadows. C. Curing Materials: 1. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., conforming to AASHO M 182, Class 3. 2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or polyethylene coated burlap conforming to ASTM C 171. 3. Curing Compound: Liquid, membrane forming compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, with fugitive dye, and guaranteed to not affect the bond, adhesion or effectiveness of floor hardeners or other applied finishes or surface treatments. Product shall be one of the following: a. “MasterKure CC 180 WB” Master Builders Solutions by BASF. b. “CS-309” by W.R. Meadows c. “Resi Chem Clear Cure” by Symons Corp. (Dayton Superior) d. “Dress and Seal WB by L&M Construction Chemicals. D. Non-Shrink Grout: For setting dowel bars and where noted. 1. Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout having a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. Use one of the following: a. “Masterflow 713” Master Builder Solutions by BASF. b. “Five Star Grout” by Five Star Products, Inc. c. “588-10K Grout” by W.R. Meadows d. “L & M Duragrout” by Laticrete International, Inc. E. Joint Fillers: 1. Provide preformed joint filler and sealant at isolation joints and where shown on Drawings. 2. Provide closed cell thermosetting polyurethane joint filler with removable strip on top edge that forms a reservoir, 1/2 inch deep from slab surface, for sealant. Material shall act as bond breaker for sealant. Water absorption of material shall not exceed 0.5% volume per ASTM D 1622. Provide “Flat Rod” by Nomaco EFS (Engineered Foam Solutions), “Deck-O-Foam” by W.R. Meadows, or approved comparable product. 3. Fill top 1/2 inch of joint with a polyurethane based sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type M (multicomponent), Grade P (pourable), Class 25 (plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability), Uses T (traffic) and NT (non-traffic), of W.R. Meadows, W.R. Grace & Co., or Master Builders Solutions by BASF. Where joints extend vertically, provide non-sag sealant of same type.

2.05. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Concrete Mixes shall be designed by an independent testing facility experienced in concrete mix design and acceptable to Owner for preparation of proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Owner. B. Allow a minimum of 14 days prior to placing concrete for testing laboratory to design the mix for each type of concrete required. C. The adequacy of the design mix shall be verified by tests on a minimum of 6 cylinders; 3 tested at least 7 days and 3 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 192 and C 39 and by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. D. Submit 3 copies of the mix design and test results to Owner's Representative for review before any concrete is placed.

033000-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Concrete for interior concrete constructions shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio of 0.46 and shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures. 1. Concrete for Slabs on Grade where Fiber Reinforcement is Used: Add 1.5 lbs of fiber reinforcement per cubic yard except where wire mesh reinforcement is to be used. F. Concrete for exterior foundations shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio of 0.52 and shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures. Incorporate an air entraining admixture yielding a total air content by volume of 4.5% to 7.5% for 3/4" top-sized aggregate and 4% to 7% for 1-1/2" top sized aggregate. G. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride salts shall not be used.

2.06. CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94, “Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” and the established mix design. B. Batch mixing at the site will not be allowed except on prior approval C. Use admixtures only as specified in the established mix design.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER A. Install vapor retarder directly under all interior concrete slabs on grade. Place retarder over the granular fill just before placement of the concrete; but do not place retarder until the granular fill has been inspected for compaction and grading per the requirements of Section 312000 “Earthwork.” B. Lap the membrane sheet edges at least 12", with the top placed in the direction of the spreading of the concrete, and seal each seam continuously with approved waterproof tape. Turn membrane up on to wall and seal with tape to wall. C. Seal all around pipes, conduits and other penetrations with tape. D. Apply tape only to dry surfaces cleaned of dirt and other contaminates. E. Just before membrane is to be covered, inspect membrane and repair all tears and visible holes with membrane manufacturer’s recommended sealing tape. For tears more than 12" long, lap a scrap piece of material to 12" beyond each side of the tear and seal all of the edges with tape.

3.02. FORMWORK A. The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 and ACI 347R, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. 2. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 3. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: a. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces (exposed surfaces and surfaces receiving items such as insulation, waterstops and/or applied membranes/sheets). b. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces (concealed surfaces except surfaces receiving items such as insulation, waterstops and/or applied membranes/sheets).

B. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys into concrete to depth indicated on Drawings.

OEMA-2019-145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete placed against the neat excavation only when acceptable to Soils Engineer and when appropriate credit is allowed. D. Coat forms with form-coating compound or non-staining form oil before setting reinforcing.

3.03. PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: Do not place steel until after forms have been coated with the form release agent. 1. Place in accordance with CRSI “Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars” and approved Shop Drawings. Do not place bars that have not been fabricated to required tolerances. 2. Use bar supports, ties, anchors and other accessories to hold bars securely to prevent displacement by construction loads or the placing of concrete.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Slabs on Grade: Except for slabs reinforced with fiber reinforcing, reinforce with the welded wire fabric specified, whether or not shown on Drawings. 2. Splices: Lap adjoining pieces amount indicated on Drawings and lace the splices with wire. If not indicated on Drawings, lap a minimum of two full mesh squares. Offset the end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap in either direction. C. Clean reinforcing steel of oil, grease, scale, rust or other coating that will impair the bond. D. Obtain approval of reinforcement placement before concrete is ordered.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached or embedded. B. The concrete work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to allow reasonable time to set sleeves, inserts and other accessories that must be in position before concrete is placed. C. Setting Bearing Plates: 1. Clean bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. 2. Set loose bearing or setting plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices and then grout into place.

D. Form holes to receive handrail posts with specified non-corroding inserts.

3.05. JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Maximum spacing as shown on Drawings, or if not shown, not to exceed 25'-0". In general, locate joints on column centerlines, under partitions, etc. 1. Locate construction joints so as not to impair the strength of the structure. 2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints unless detailed otherwise. B. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Saw to 1/5 slab thickness, 1/8" wide, but not less than 1" deep. Maximum spacing as indicated on Drawings. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete hardens sufficiently to prevent raveling. In no case shall the sawing be delayed beyond 12 hours after completion of the pour. Additional joints subject to approval. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

033000-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface and fill with joint sealants, specified herein. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.06. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Pre-Placement Inspection and Preparation of Soils: Do not place concrete until bearing soil, and/or compacted subgrades have been inspected, and forms and reinforcing have been cleaned and inspected. Verify that vapor retarder under slabs has been approved. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. B. Placing Footings: Place on undisturbed clean surfaces, free from frost, ice, snow mud and water. When foundation is on dry soil or absorptive material, cover the area with waterproof sheathing paper or wet down the surfaces receiving concrete. C. Placement by Chute: Maintain continuous concrete flow down chutes. Use metal or metal lined wood chute, sloped to not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal, nor more than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal. Provide discharge chute and baffle plate to prevent segregation. Maintain discharge end as near deposit surface as practicable. If discharge height is more than 60" above concrete being deposited, use spout. When pouring is intermittent, discharge the chute contents into hoppers. Clean the chute thoroughly before and after each run. Discharge waste material and flush water outside of the forms. D. Cold Weather Placement: Per ACI 306.1 “Recommended Practice for Winter Concreting.” 1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature may fall below 40°F within 24 hours of placement or below 30°F during the succeeding 6 days unless proper provision has been made for heating and/or insulating concrete. 2. Temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be 50°F to 70°F. E. Hot Weather Placement: Per ACI 305.1 “Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.” F. Consolidation: Vibrate, spade and rod the concrete so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and corners, eliminating air and stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Using vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically only.

3.07. FINISHING A. Form Removal: 1. Formwork for walls may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured by one of the methods specified under CURING AND PROTECTION. B. Finishing of Formed Surfaces: Remove all form tie ends and fill form tie holes and holes more than 1/2" deep with mortar made from 1 part portland cement to 2 parts sand. 1. Rough Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces not exposed to view and not receiving insulation, or dampproofing, or waterproofing may be left with texture imparted by the form’s facing material. 2. Smooth Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces receiving insulation, or dampproofing, or water proofing, as well as surfaces to receive smooth-rubbed finish, shall have fins and other projections removed, honeycombs filled and other defects made smooth. Where water proofing is included in the project; comply with the requirements of ASTM D 5295. a. Smooth-Rubbed Finish (where noted on Drawings): Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive

OEMA-2019-145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. C. Slabs: 1. Float Finish: Apply to all interior slabs and to exterior platform slabs. a. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until surface water has disappeared. Float the concrete with a wood bullfloat to an even surface without drawing laitance-producing fines to the surface. b. At exterior slabs, re-float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Leave surfaces free of ridges created by edges of float. c. Finished surface shall be flat to a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with 10-ft straightedge. Unless indicated otherwise, slope floors toward drains at 1/8" per foot starting 15" from drains. 2. Trowel Finish: Apply to all interior slab surfaces. a. After floating, begin first troweling after slab has hardened such that laitance-producing fines will not be worked to the surface. b. Where carpet or resinous flooring are to be installed, trowel again after first troweling is complete and surface has hardened sufficient to ring the trowel, troweling to a burnished finish (but without “burning” the surface). c. Leave surfaces free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 foot long straightedge resting on two high spots, and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/8 inch. d. Grind smooth any surface defects that may telegraph through applied floor covering system. Except where slabs will be exposed to view, fill depressions outside of tolerances with filler that is compatible with (and approved by) flooring manufacturer.

3.08. CURING AND PROTECTION A. Restrict rate of moisture loss and maintain relatively constant temperatures as necessary for the hydration of the cement to achieve the required strength and hardness. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessive hot or cold temperatures. Prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Curing of Floor Slabs Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile or Resinous Flooring: Immediately following any finishing operations, keep concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods until end of curing period: 1. Burlap covering kept continuously wet. 2. Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering. 3. Moisture resistant insulating blankets. 4. Spraying with curing compound: NOT ALLOWED. C. Curing of Floor Slabs to Receive Carpet: Immediately following the finishing operation, keep concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods until end of curing period: 1. Burlap covering kept continuously wet. 2. Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering. 3. Rewetting concrete as required. 4. Moisture resistant insulating blankets. 5. Spraying with curing compound at rate required to meet ASTM C 309 criteria. D. Curing of Footings and Foundation Walls: Same as for floors receiving carpet. E. Duration of Curing: At least 165 cumulative hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. If high-early strength concrete has been used, the final curing shall continue for an accumulated 3 days.

033000-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO F. Cold Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 306.1. Protect subgrade beneath footings, foundations, slabs, etc., from frost action. Backfill, insulate, and/or heat as required to prevent damage due to frost heaving and unequal settling after thaw. G. Hot Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 305.1.

3.09. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTS A. Cooperate with the laboratory in every respect by arranging material for sampling and supplying necessary facilities at the job site for making the field tests and storing specimens. B. Tests shall be made for each 50 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof, but not less than 2 for each day’s pour. Perform the following tests: 1. Compression Test: Make a minimum of 3 standard 6"x12" cylinders for testing, one at the age of 7 days, and one for testing at 28 days, unless otherwise directed. If compression tests are to be used for determining when forms may be removed, make at least 2 additional cylinders and cure on job site in accordance with ASTM C 31. 2. Tests for Air-Entrainment: Per ASTM C 231, on a random basis, as determined by the Owner's Representative. 3. Slump Test: Per ASTM C 143. Contractor shall provide cone and make tests whenever requested by Owner's Representative. Test each and every truckload. 1/2" tolerance allowed each way. 4. Additional Tests: If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative there is any question as to the quality of the concrete already placed, make additional tests as directed. Tests may be either compression tests on cored cylinders, per ASTM C 42; or load tests as outlined in ACI 318; or as directed. These tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. C. Evaluation of Tests: In accordance with ACI 214-83. D. Test Reports: Furnish for all tests. Report must show exact location of work represented by samples and tests.

E. Concrete Floor Slab Water Test: Water testing of the interior concrete floor slabs shall be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, and in the presence of the Owner and the resinous flooring Installer. The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling of testing with the Owner and the resinous flooring Installer.

1. After curing, the concrete floor slabs in the back of the house, and at other areas as directed by Owner, shall be water tested to determine if the slab has depressions where water will pond. The Contractor shall confirm with Owner areas to be tested.

2. If ponding at a depth of more than 1/8” occurs, the Contractor shall fill the depressions with a filler compatible with, and approved by, the flooring system to be installed above the depression.

3. After the filler has cured, the Contractor shall perform another water test in the presence of the Owner and the resinous flooring Installer. If ponding in excess of 1/8” depth is still present, the Contractor shall repeat the fill and test procedure until the Owner is satisfied that water in excess of 1/8” depth will not pond on the floor.

4. The Contractor shall mark locations of interior walls for reference. Where water ponds at a depth less than 1/8” deep, but occurs in an area where it will not be easily accessed for removal (as determined by Owner), the resinous flooring installer shall mark the location and fill with specified patching material to minimize water ponding in finish floor.

3.10. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK

A. Concrete Splashblocks: Provide precast concrete splashblocks under all exterior downspouts.

OEMA-2019-145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Bollards:

1. Anchor bollards (furnished under Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications”) in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non- shrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Erect bollards vertical in all planes and brace until grout and concrete fill sets. Grout shall be evenly sloped away from bollard to provide approximately 1/8 inch slope for water drainage.

2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete. a. Bollards to Receive Cover: Strike concrete flat with top of pipe to allow for installation of bollard cover. b. Bollards to be Painted: Slope top of concrete fill to drain water.

C. Curbs (at housekeeping pad, etc.): Provide finish to interior curbs with profile as required by resinous flooring manufacturer.

END 033000.

033000-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 4 – MASONRY SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortars and grouts. 3. Masonry ties and reinforcing. 4. Cold weather protection including any heat or temporary shelters required. 5. Installation of work furnished under other Sections for embedment into masonry. 6. Masonry anchorages. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Setting of dowels at base of vertically reinforced walls...... Section 033000. 2. Manufactured stone veneer...... Section 047300. 3. Metal cap at top of enclosure wall...... Section 076200. 4. Control joint sealants...... Section 079200. 5. Painting...... Section 099000.

1.02. CODES AND STANDARDS A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the standards of masonry installation described in the recommendations of: 1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Spec. (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Construction Conference: Masonry installers shall meet with Architect before construction begins to review the materials and methods that the contractor will establish to meet the requirements specified herein below. B. Sources of Supply: Obtain each kind of masonry unit from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color or uniform blend in the variation thereof, for each kind required, for each continuous area or visually related areas. C. Coordination: Coordinate with concrete installers with respect to installation of bar reinforcement in concrete foundations to be extended up into reinforced masonry walls.

1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Submit Product Data for: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials including additives. 3. Mortar and grout mix compositions. 4. Masonry ties and reinforcing.

C. Certificates: Along with Product Data submit: 1. Letter of certification from concrete masonry manufacturer confirming that the concrete masonry supplied to the site will be manufactured in the same manner as the concrete masonry tested and found to conform to the performance requirements specified herein below. Attach test reports to letter.

OEMA-2019-145 UNIT MASONRY 042000-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Letter of certification from manufacturer of ties confirming the quality of coating furnished on the ties delivered to the site.

D. Submit laboratory test results for masonry materials. 1. Submit design data for grout mixes when grout is to be pumped.

1.05. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cement, Lime, Etc: 1. Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product identification labels. 2. Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site. B. Protection from Damp: Protect all masonry materials from precipitation and dampness. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Store at site under well-ventilated cover so as to maintain concrete masonry moisture level at or under values specified herein below for concrete masonry at time of delivery. 2. Sand And Aggregates: Store on clean surfaces isolated from below-grade moisture. 3. Cement and Lime: Store cement and lime isolated from below-grade moisture and away from cold concrete floors and masonry. C. Handling: Handle masonry units so as to avoid chipping and breakage.

1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection From Precipitation: 1. Maintain masonry free of accumulations of water. 2. During erection, cover tops of walls with strong, weatherproof membranes, extending a minimum of 2 feet down both sides and securely held in place. B. Masonry deemed to be frozen shall be removed from the site. C. Comply with hot and cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. Type: Medium weight hollow load bearing units made with ASTM C 33 and ASTM C 331 aggregates to conform to ASTM C 90, including a total linear drying shrinkage less than 0.045%. a. Normal weight units made with ASTM C 33 aggregates and meeting the same requirements may also, at contractor's option, be used. 2. Size and Shape: 8" x 16" nominal face size; thicknesses as indicated. 3. Cores: Use only 2 core concrete masonry units for concrete masonry walls with vertical reinforcement; otherwise, 2-core or 3-core concrete masonry may be used. 4. Moisture Limits: Units shall be cured in a moisture-controlled atmosphere so that when delivered to job site the weight of water contained in the units shall not exceed 35% of the fully saturated capacity of the concrete masonry.

042000-2 UNIT MASONRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO a. Moisture content of units stored at the site shall be maintained so as to not exceed 35% of concrete masonry saturation capacity.

2.02. REINFORCEMENT AND TIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Specifications and Drawings, provide products by the following: 1. Hohmann & Barnard 2. Heckman Building Products 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America (Wire-Bond) B. Bar Reinforcement (if any): 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed new billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Prefabricated units formed from #9 galvanized steel wire, specifically fabricated for holding steel reinforcing bars in proper relationship to concrete masonry cores. C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Factory welded units fabricated from cold drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82. 1. Type: Ladder type, truss type not allowed. 2. Side Rods: Two deformed #9 wires. 3. Cross Rods: Plain #9 wire. 4. Width: 2" less than nominal thickness of wall. 5. Finish: Hot-Dip Galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A 153, Class B2 (1.50 oz per sq ft). 6. Corners: Factory fabricated matching “L” units only. Field fabricated corner units and lapped units at corners NOT allowed.

2.03. CONCEALED FLASHINGS

A. Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: Self adhering, cold-applied membrane, minimum 40 mil total thickness, consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to 8 mil thick cross-laminated high density polyethylene film with release liner. Overall membrane puncture resistance per ASTM E 154 shall be not less than 80 pounds; peel adhesion per ASTM D 903 shall be not less than 5lbs/in width; and membrane tensile strength per ASTM D412 shall be not less than1200 psi. Provide one of the following: 1. Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF” 2. GCP Applied Technologies “Perm-a-Barrier Wall Flashing” 3. Heckmann Building Products, Inc “No. 82 Rubberized Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing”

B. Surface Primer: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended surface conditioner.

C. Mastic Sealant: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant for repairing membrane and sealing edges, joints and punctures.

D. Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 26-gauge stainless steel, depth as required for masonry thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and projecting out 1/2" at 45°; or pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Drip Plate” by Hohmann & Barnard, “#4165 Drip Edge Flashing” by Wire-Bond, or “Drip Edge” by IPCO.

E. Setting Mastic For Metal Drip: Same mastic as used for repair of flashing membrane.

F. Metal Termination Bar: One piece, surface mounted, 0.090" thick mill finish aluminum, “Trufast TB-90F” flat termination bar, as manufactured by Altenloh, Brinck & Co., Inc., or Architect approved comparable product. Install aluminum termination bar in lengths not more than 4 ft long. 1. All fasteners shall be installed with neoprene washers.

OEMA-2019-145 UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2.04. MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion Control Joint Accessories:

1. Bond Breaker Strips: No. 15 asphalt roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 226, or No. 15 coal tar roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 227.

2. Premolded Control Joint Strips for Concrete Masonry Units: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash masonry units and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated.

B. Compressible Joint Filler: Fire-rated safing insulation (mineral fiber insulation), full width and thickness of joint.

C. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. One of the following:

1. “Mortar Trap Weep Vents” by Hohmann & Barnard. 2. “Weep Vent” by Mortar Net Solutions. 3. “Mortar Break Weep Mesh” by Advanced Building Products, Inc. 4. “Driwall Weep Vents” by Keene Building Products 5. “CavClear Weep Vents” by CavClear / Archovations, Inc.

2.05. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, non-staining, Type I, gray. B. Masonry Cement: Not permitted. C. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand: Conforming to ASTM C 144, except that 100% shall pass the #8 sieve and 15% - 30% shall pass the #50 sieve. E. Grout Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone well graded from 1/2" to #16 and conforming to ASTM C 404. When fine aggregates are required, conform to ASTM C 404. F. Additives: Not allowed, including calcium chloride or other chloride bearing formulations, as well as any air entraining agents. G. Water: Clean, potable, free from oil, soluble salts, acids, alkalis, organic impurities and other deleterious materials.

2.06. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar Mix Proportions: Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar, complying with ASTM C 270, Type N, having average (in-field, not lab) compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions by volume: one (1) part non-staining Portland Cement, one (1) part hydrated lime and six (6) parts mason’s sand. B. Grout Mix Proportions:

1. For Embedment of Reinforcing Bars and Filling CMU Cores: Coarse Grout per ASTM C 476: 1 part portland cement, up to 1/10th part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate, by volume. a. Slump: 8" to 10". b. Compressive Strength: 2000 psi at 28 days.

2. For Filling Hollow Metal Door Frames: Use mortar, the same as used for adjacent masonry. C. Combining Ingredients:

042000-4 UNIT MASONRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Measurements: Measure ingredients precisely. a. Keep water-cement ratio precise from batch to batch. b. Accurately measure sand in damp, loose condition; measurement of sand by shovelful will NOT be allowed. Allow for contraction and expansion of sand’s volume as it dries out and it gains moisture. 2. Mixing Mortar: Mix ingredients thoroughly in motorized mechanical batch mixer according to ASTM C 270 procedures for at least 3 minutes but no more than 5 minutes after all material is in mixer. Mix only as much mortar as needed for immediate use. a. Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, keep water warmed to above 70°F but do not allow it to exceed 160°F. When heating sand, heat slowly and evenly. Scorched sand shall be discarded. 3. Mixing Grout: Mix thoroughly in mechanical batch mixer according to ASTM C 476 procedures; hand mixing not allowed without approval. Grout may be premixed and delivered per ASTM C 94. Use only enough water to produce a workable consistency, except that for placement by pump more water may be added. a. Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, mix grout according to cold weather restrictions for mortar, and deliver at 70°F-120°F. 4. Admixtures: Do not use except as specifically allowed by Architect. 5. Pre-Mixed Mortars: In addition to regular on-site motor-mixed mortars, “Silo-Mix” or PCI “Spec-Mix” may be used. Truck delivered batch mixing shall conform to ASTM C 1142. 6. Repointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix dry materials together before adding any water. Then add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add additional water in small portions until a workable but stiff consistency is reached. 7. Mortar Mixers, Boxes and Tools: Keep clean; thoroughly clean equipment and tools between batches and at end of each day’s work. D. Re-tempering: 1. Partially hardened mortar may be re-tempered to replace water lost through evaporation. 2. Do not retemper mortars out of mixer for more than 2-1/2 hours; but, rather, dispose of such mortar. 3. Repointing mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened repointing mix.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Do not build with wet or damp masonry units. Use only thoroughly dry units. B. Lay-up masonry plumb and true to line and to levels indicated, with level courses and accurately spaced units. Coordinate with work of other trades. Exposed work shall show no chips. Do not use cut masonry units where full units can be used. C. Cutting: Make all unit cuts exposed to view, including those for boxes, with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. After cutting, clean sawdust from pores of concrete masonry. D. Frost: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. Do not build on frozen work. Removed ice and snow from masonry beds by applying heat until the surface is dry to the touch. E. Organic Materials: Do not build materials subject to deterioration into the work.

OEMA-2019-145 UNIT MASONRY 042000-5 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Step unfinished work; use toothing only when approved. Remove loose masonry and mortar. Clean joining area and lightly dampen brick before starting new work. G. Mortar Boxes and Tools: Thoroughly clean between batches and at end of each day’s work. H. Temporary Bracing: Brace new masonry constructions against damage by winds until mortar reaches its required strength and adjacent structures can provide permanent bracing. I. Bearing: Where structural members bear on concrete masonry walls, provide solid concrete masonry units or hollow concrete masonry filled solid with concrete grout, unless otherwise noted or shown.

3.02. BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Apply force to masonry units when setting into place in order to maximize bed bond and head bond. B. Adjustments: Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. C. Concrete Masonry Units: Use only sound units, free of cracks. Do not use chipped faces in work exposed to view. 1. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Apply enough mortar at bed and end joints to allow excess mortar to be forced out both sides of face shell. Completely fill head joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on foundation walls, and where adjacent to cores or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete grout. 3. Mortar beds for solid concrete masonry units shall cover 100% of the horizontal surface. Completely fill head joints. 4. Fill cores solid with mortar where indicated on Drawings. 5. Do not dampen concrete masonry units. D. Corners: Fully bond and interlock corners. Fill snap-line holes. Do not expose cut masonry faces to weather. E. Intersections: In load bearing walls, interlock by at least 4" the masonry units in intersecting walls. If abutting load-bearing walls are carried up separately, intersections may be interlocked with 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 24" “Z” or “flat-U” steel slats grouted into cells at 24" o.c. vertically. F. String Lines: Set lines in manner to avoid making holes in mortar.

3.03. COURSING, BOND PATTERNS AND SPECIAL SHAPES A. Place masonry to levels indicated. Keep vertical joints aligned and plumb from course to course.

B. Joint Widths: 3/8", unless shown otherwise, except for minor variations up to 1/8" required to maintain bond alignment. This also specifically includes head joints. C. Bond for Concrete Masonry Units: Lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Course one concrete masonry unit and one mortar joint to equal 8”. D. Tolerances for Concrete Masonry Units: Masonry shall be installed within the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit at Finish Side: 1/16" maximum at concrete masonry units. 2. Variation of Linear Wall Line: 1/4" in 10ft; 1/2" in 20ft or bay greater than 20ft; 3/4" in 40ft or more; non-cumulative. 3. Variation from Plumb: 1/4" in 10ft but not more than 1/2" in 40ft or more.

042000-6 UNIT MASONRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8" in 3ft; 1/4" in 10ft; 1/2" in 20ft or more. 5. Single Wythe Masonry Partitions: a. Install concrete masonry units to create smooth surface on side indicated to receive exterior insulation finish system or manufactured stone masonry veneer.

3.04. JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete masonry walls and partitions as follows: 1. Spacing: Install wire reinforcement in horizontal joints, spaced 16" o.c. vertically, unless closer spacing is indicated. 2. Tops and Bottoms of Walls: Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint above bottom of walls and below top of walls. 3. Openings: Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings greater than 1' 0" wide, extending reinforcement at least 16" beyond each side of opening. 4. End Laps: Lap joint reinforcement ends a minimum of 6", placing a cross wire of each piece within the lap. 5. Intersections and Corners: Use only preformed welded units at corners and intersections, extending at least 18" each way; do not lap straight units at “T” intersections nor cut and bend joint reinforcement at “L” corners. 6. Mortar Coverage: Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length: minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls after tooling and 1/2" at other locations. 7. Control and Expansion Joints: Break reinforcement at control joints. Do not bridge control or expansion joints with reinforcing except at wall openings and where otherwise shown.

3.05. BAR REINFORCED MASONRY A. Concrete Masonry Placement: 1. Set masonry unit webs in full mortar beds to maintain leak-free cells. Fill end joints to the full depth of face shell thickness. 2. Lay masonry units to pour height, up to bottom of bond beam, but not more than 5ft high. 3. Maintain grout spaces free of excess mortar and debris. When pours exceed a height of 5 feet, provide cleanouts in face shells of each vertically reinforced cell, at bottom of each lift, in order to remove excess mortar before grouting in accordance with Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Specifications. B. Bond Beam Reinforcement (if any): 1. Make bond beams continuous. 2. Reinforce bond beams, when not indicated otherwise, with two No. 4 bars placed 1" from bottom web. 3. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315. Return bars around corners a minimum of 8". Do not use defective bars or bars bent incorrectly. 4. Lap the splices to provide at least a Class A splice per ACI 318. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D12.1 to obtain full strength of reinforcing bar. 5. Construct bond beams so as to pass vertical reinforcing rods for walls. C. Vertical Reinforcement for Walls (if any): Reinforce concrete masonry walls with vertical steel bar reinforcement where indicated on Drawings.

OEMA-2019-145 UNIT MASONRY 042000-7 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Base Dowels: Coordinate with work under Section 033000 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” to assure that steel bar dowels shown on Structural Drawings to be cast into the concrete will align with masonry cores. 2. Wall Reinforcement: Place bars before grout is placed, keeping bars at least the following distance from walls of cells: 1/2" for #4 bars in interior walls, 1” for #4 bars in exterior walls, and 1-1/4” for #5 bars or larger. When bars will not maintain vertical alignment, fix bars with bar aligner clips or jigs. Place steel bars in sections as masonry progresses upward. Lap successive bars a minimum of 12" and tie together with wire. 3. Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect. Lap splices to provide at least Class A splices per ACI 318. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D12.1 to obtain full strength of reinforcing bar. 4. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315. 5. Secure reinforcing bars against displacement, spacing supports at not more than 160 bar diameters nor more than 10ft apart, whichever is less. Maintain position within 1/2" of true dimension. 6. Extend reinforcement continuous for full height of wall, unless noted otherwise. When an overhead obstruction prevents placement of masonry units around reinforcing bars at top course, terminate bars just below top course and fill top course with 100% solid concrete masonry units. 7. Maintain distance between bars equal to 1.5 times the nominal bar size but not less than 1- 1/2", except as shown otherwise. D. Grouting:

1. Remove loose rust and scale from reinforcing bars and remove mortar protruding into the cavity. Remove rust, ice, water and dirt from cavities before pouring grout.

2. Grout walls using low-lift grouting technique in lifts not more than 5ft high, allowing at least 24 hours to pass between successive lifts.

3. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Do not disturb reinforcement while placing grout. Terminate vertical pours 1" to 2" below the joints between courses of masonry.

4. Consolidate grout 5 to 10 minutes after pouring. Puddle and rod the grout with each 12" depth of pour. When lifts exceed 12", vibrate the grout using a low velocity mechanical vibrator having a pencil head (3/4" to 1" diameter) and then reconsolidate the grout after it has lost its initial water.

5. Place grout in bond beam course before filling cores above bond beam. Terminate grout pours for reinforced vertical cells 1" to 2" below bond beam course.

3.06. EXPANSION CONTROL JOINTS (CJ):

A. Exterior Concrete Masonry Walls: Locate expansion control joints (designated “CJ” on Drawings) as indicated and as required to limit spacing to 18 feet, consistent with building lines with at least one control joint within 4 feet of each external corner. Also, locate a control joint within each offset in the plane of any wall..

B. Where expansion control joints occur at openings in walls, place joint at one side of opening when less than 6ft wide and at both sides of opening when opening is over 6 ft. wide.

C. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across expansion control joints.

D. Remove all mortar from expansion control joints. Where control joints are adjacent to door/window openings, rake out mortar from joint in front of lintel, next to control joint.

042000-8 UNIT MASONRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Install resilient control joint filler in continuous lengths into vertical expansion control joints.

3.07. BUILT-IN WORK

A. General: As work progresses, build in hollow metal door frames, metal joist anchor plates, sleeves and other items supplied under other Sections to be built into masonry work. Build in items plumb and level.

B. Sleeves for Pipes, Conduits, Etc.: Mortar the sleeves solidly in place, accurately fit to the alignments requested by other trades. Extend sleeves 1/2” beyond each face of wall or partition.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Grout-in frames by filling frame voids solid with mortar. Rake out excess grout from joint between frame and wall after grout has achieved initial set.

3.08. MASONRY FLASHING

A. Flashing Fabrication: Form typical thru-wall flashings by adhering self-adhesive flashing membrane to a stainless steel edge drip adhering membrane all across the top of the sheet metal without wrinkles or fishmouths. Trim membrane at face of masonry.

1. Install the metal edge drip to make continuous runs. Make “dollar” lap joints, overlapping joints 6"; or lap the metal joints 1" and fill with the mastic used to set the edge drip. Trim the metal length to match the width of the flashing.

B. Flashing Installation:

1. Comply with flashing membrane manufacturer’s temperature limitations.

2. Use sufficient membrane material to loosely extend flashing to backup construction and to extend flashing at least 12" up backup construction.

3. Do not stretch flashing when applying.

4. Install in one piece to the extent practicable. Lap flashing a minimum of 6" at joints and seal joint edges continuously with mastic recommended by membrane flashing manufacturer. Cut out fishmouths and wrinkles, patch and reseal.

5. Set metal edge strips in continuous beds of waterproof mastic with drip extending out 1/2" from face of wall.

6. Clean surface of backup construction. Bond the flashing membrane to backup construction, using adhesive recommended by membrane manufacturer for the type of substrate shown. Anchor top of flashing membrane to backup with metal termination bar and seal top of termination bar with mastic.

7. Press fresh, clean surface of membrane firmly onto substrates and roll-in with a metal-wheeled roller.

8. Seal all around bolts, anchors, brick ties, sill anchors, holes and punctures with mastic recommended by membrane manufacturer.

3.09. MORTAR JOINT FINISHING A. Tooled Joints: Tool all mortar joints not concealed by other work. Joints to be concealed shall be struck flush. 1. At time of laying, strike all masonry joints flush. For surfaces to receive exterior insulation finish system, stucco and manufactured stone masonry veneer, after cutting joints flush, lightly rake joints —to avoid bulging of mortar as wall construction progresses— and rub joint smooth.

OEMA-2019-145 UNIT MASONRY 042000-9 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Where joints are not concealed by other work, when mortar in joints becomes thumbprint hard, tool to a hard, concave finish, using sled-type jointer at least 16" long, with diameter 1/8" to 1/4" larger than joint.

3.10. FITTING AND PATCHING

A. Do all cutting and patching of masonry required by other trades.

B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated on Drawings or where appearance or strength of masonry may be impaired

3.11. REPAIR AND FINAL POINTING A. At completion of the work, cut out and re-point all holes, cracks and defective joints, using mortar colored to match after it dries. Cut out hardened mortar to a depth of 1/2" and dampen the hardened mortar before patching. 1. Replace damaged masonry. Spot patching of exposed units with mortar not allowed. 2. Retool and reclean joint patches to match adjacent work. Leave exterior walls watertight.

3.12. CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and droppings as work progresses, avoiding stains and smears. Do not allow excess mortar lumps or smears to harden on finish surfaces. B. Protect exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

C. When concrete masonry placement is complete, rub masonry with carborundum brick to remove all sharp edges and then clean work with stiff bristle (non-metallic) brushes, or other approved method, removing loose granules, building dust, loose efflorescence, etc. Comply with recommendations of NCMA TEK Bulletin 08-04A.

3.13. PROTECTION A. At day’s end and when precipitation is anticipated, cover tops of unfinished walls with plastic sheeting to prevent moisture infiltration. B. Protect exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. C. Brace and shore masonry constructions until they are able to withstand ambient wind loads. D. Do not allow uniform structural loads to be applied to unbraced or unshored masonry for at least 12 hours after construction.

END 042000.

042000-10 UNIT MASONRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 4 – MASONRY SECTION 047300 - MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Exterior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with sill/watertable, and trim pieces. Include pier and seating wall caps if shown on Drawings. 2. Interior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with non-structural lintel (if shown) and trim pieces. 3. Mortars. 4. Concealed flashings and metal drips. 5. Hot and/or cold weather protection including any heat or temporary shelters required. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Wood framing, sheathing and weather resistive barrier ...... Section 061000. 2. EIFS ...... Section 072400. 3. Joint sealants...... Section 079200.

1.02. CODES AND STANDARDS A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the standards of masonry installation described in the recommendations of: 1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 2. Masonry Veneer Manufacturer Association (MVMA) Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer, current edition. 3. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Spec. (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602). 4. International Code Council-Evaluation Service, ICC–ES Evaluation Report, or comparable testing service report, for manufactured stone veneer system provided. 5. ASTM C1780 – Standard Practice for Installation Methods for Adhered Manufactured Stone Masonry Veneer.

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall verify the pattern selection and color of the manufactured stone with the Owner. B. Sources of Supply: Obtain primary manufactured stone veneer and trim from one source and manufactured by one firm, of uniform texture and color or uniform blend in the variation thereof, for each kind required, for each continuous area or visually related areas. Provide secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. C. Manufacturer: 1. Must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the supply of comparable stone veneer. 2. Must provide field service representative. D. Installers: 1. Must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing manufactured stone masonry veneer and have completed a minimum of ten (10) projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be approved by the manufactured stone veneer manufacturer. 2. Must examine all parts of supporting structure and conditions which stonework is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with stonework installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

OEMA-2019-145 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 047300-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. Must review Installation procedures and coordination of other related work with the Architect, Contractor and subcontractors whose work will be affected by the stonework. 4. Must, when directed by the Architect and/or Contractor, meet at the site and review installation and coordination procedures, prior to the start of stonework.

1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: For each type of product provided, including: 1. Mortar materials including additives. 2. Mortar mix compositions. 3. Concealed wall flashings and metal drips. 4. Manufactured stone trim components. 5. Metal trim components. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing dimensions, sections and provisions for application to back-up substrate. Indicate layout, show profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. D. Samples: Based upon preliminary manufactured stone selection, as indicated on Drawings, the supplier shall: 1. Submit 3 sets of samples not less than 8” x 12” in size of each color, grade and finish of manufactured stone required. Include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work. 2. Submit samples with at least one mortar bonded joint per set. E. Submit manufacturer’s proof of qualifications. F. Submit proof of manufactured stone veneer manufacturer’s approval of installer. G. Submit manufacturers written maintenance instructions. H. Submit copies of product and installation warranties.

1.05. MOCKUP A. Provide mock up as described below and as illustrated on Drawings. Owner may choose to reduce the scope of the mock up. B. Contractor shall coordinate with the exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), aluminum storefront system, glazing, joint sealant and other material contractors and suppliers in erecting a minimum 4’ x 4’ mockup for approval by the Owner. The mock up shall include: 1. For manufactured stone portion: field of stone showing full range of stone color and shapes to be provided, mortar, stone sill/watertable, return of sill/watertable at pier, vertical control joint through stone and sill/watertable, penetration detail, flashing/ weep screed/ drip at bottom of stone. 2. For EIFS portion: field of EIFS showing color(s) and texture, vertical control joint, vertical joint between two colors of EIFS, vertical joint between EIFS and manufactured stone, reveal, penetration detail, backwrap and flashing with drip at bottom of EIFS. C. Mockup shall be erected in a location as approved by Owner. D. Mockup shall be erected prior to construction of the exterior walls and shall be independent of the building. The approved mockup shall remain in place to be used to compare with the completed exterior wall surfaces. Upon approval of the Owner, the mockup shall be removed from the site.

1.06. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cement, Lime, Etc:

047300-2 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product identification labels. 2. Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site. 3. Store on elevated platform, under cover and in dry location. Avoid exposure to moisture. B. Deliver stone materials in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Protect all stonework materials, from weather, moisture and contamination with earth and foreign materials. C. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for handling manufactured stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. D. Store stone on non-staining wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and manufactured stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stone.

1.07. JOB CONDITIONS A. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations and limitations for environmental conditions. B. Cold Weather Construction: 1. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace stonework damaged by frost or freezing. 2. Protect stonework against freezing. Heat materials and provide temporary protection to prevent freezing of stonework materials. Continue to protect installation from freezing until mortar is fully cured (minimum14 days). Comply with requirements of governing code. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not use calcium chloride to thaw ice on construction. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents, nor use calcium chloride in mortar. C. Hot Weather Construction: 1. Lightly dampen manufactured stone and surface of scratch coat prior to application of manufactured stone. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions and comply with requirements of governing code. D. During all seasons, protect partially completed stonework against weather when work is not in progress. Cover tops of walls with strong waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least 2 feet down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.

E. Allow no construction activity on opposite side of wall where manufactured stone is being installed, during installation and for a minimum of 48 hours after completion of installation.

1.08. WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer’s standard fifty (50) year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials of manufactured stone veneer products. B. Provide Installer’s standard one (1) year warranty against defects in installation of manufactured stone veneer products.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer: Provide manufactured stone veneer and trim of manufacturer and in category, style and color indicated on Drawings.

OEMA-2019-145 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 047300-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Manufactured stone veneer, sill/watertable, lintel (if shown), and trim: Meet ICC-ES AC-51. All trim shall be manufactured of materials and colors to match field stone. Provide units as noted and identified on drawings and as follows: 1. Preformed outside corners with alternating long and short legs. 2. Sills/watertables with positive slope away from building (minimum 12%) and complying with details on Drawings. 3. Specially formed units with flat face for use at penetrations. C. Mortar Materials: 1. Cement: Provide white cement of one of the following kinds. a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except complying with the staining requirements of ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Sand: ASTM C 144, except graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve for 1/4" and narrower joints. 4. Additive for Moisture Resistance: Ammonium stearate, aluminum tri-stearate or calcium stearate. 5. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. 6. Mixes for Scratch Coat, Stone Installation Mortar, and Pointing Mortar: Comply with building code requirements of 50 PSI shear bond when tested in accordance with ASTM C482. Components shall be non-staining. Provide mixes as recommended in stone manufacturer’s printed instructions for each step of installation and as required for specific job conditions.

7. Scratch Coat Mortar Mix: Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar, complying with ASTM C 270, Type N, using specified materials and having average (in-field, not lab) compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions by volume: one (1) part non-staining Portland Cement, one (1) part hydrated lime and six (6) parts mason’s sand. 8. Traditional Setting Bed Mortar Mix: Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar, complying with ASTM C 270, Type S, using specified materials and having average (in-field, not lab) compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions by volume: one (1) part non-staining Portland Cement, one half (1/2) part hydrated lime and four and one half (4-1/2) parts mason’s sand. 9. Enhanced Adhesion Setting Bed Mortar Mix: Setting bed mortar shall be non-staining, non- sag, pre-packaged, dry set mortar mix with latex additive meeting all requirements of ANSI A118.15. a. MegaLite RS Ultimate Rapid Setting Crack Prevention Large Format Tile Mortar as manufactured by Custom Building Products. 10. Pointing Mortar Mix: Non-staining, masonry cement/sand mortar, Type N, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions: one (1) part non-staining Masonry Cement, two and one half (2-1/2) parts finely graded clean mason’s sand as per manufactured stone manufacturer’s installation instructions. 11. Retempering: Do not retemper mortars as this will reduce the strength of the bond. D. Stonework Accessories: 1. Expanded Metal Lath: 2.5 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60. 2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, of size recommended by manufactured stone manufacturer for substrate and condition and complying with ASTM C1063.

047300-4 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. Anchorages: 2” x 2” galvanized steel clip angles, unless noted otherwise. Provide clip angles as detailed and as needed to support manufactured stone trim components that are deeper than 2-5/8”. 4. Metal Trim Accessories: Provide corrosion resistant steel control joints, casing beads and weep (sill) screeds. a. Weep (Sill) Screed: Minimum 26 gauge, G60 glavanized, complying with ASTM C847. For use as horizontal edges at bottom of mortar beds. #36 Sill Screed, ClarkDietrich Building Systems or comparable product. b. Casing Bead: Comply with ASTM C1047 and C1063. Zinc shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM B69. For use as vertical edges at dissimilar materials and horizontal edges at top of mortar beds. #66X Expanded Flange Casing Bead, ClarkDietrich Building Systems or comparable product. c. Control Joint: Comply with ASTM C 1063. Zinc shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM B69. #15 Double-V Control Joint and #30 Corner Master Control Joint or comparable product. 5. Adhesive: Provide adhesive recommended by manufactured stone manufacturer for anchoring sill / watertable set with angle supports. E. Concealed Flashings:

1. Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: Self adhering, cold-applied membrane, minimum 40 mil total thickness, consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to 8 mil thick cross-laminated high density polyethylene film with release liner. Overall membrane puncture resistance per ASTM E 154 shall be not less than 80 pounds; peel adhesion per ASTM D 903 shall be not less than 5lbs/in width; and membrane tensile strength per ASTM D412 shall be not less than1200 psi. Provide one of the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies “Perm-a-Barrier Wall Flashing” b. Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF” c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc “No. 82 Rubberized Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing”

2. Surface Primer: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended surface conditioner.

3. Mastic Sealant: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant for repairing membrane and sealing edges, joints and punctures.

4. Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 26-gauge stainless steel, depth as required for masonry thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and projecting out 1/2" at 45°; or pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Drip Plate” by Hohmann & Barnard, “#4165 Drip Edge Flashing” by Wire-Bond, or “Drip Edge” by IPCO.

5. Setting Mastic For Metal Drip: Same mastic as used for repair of flashing membrane. F. Fabrication: Fabricate stone as shown and in compliance with the recommendations of the stone supplier.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive manufactured stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of manufactured stone masonry. B. Prior to beginning work of this section, verify that the weather resistive barriers are installed correctly and with upper courses lapped over lower courses. Also verify correct lapping condition at all flashings, windows, doors and other openings / penetrations. Verify that all penetrations are sealed and that all tears or other damage to barriers are repaired and sealed.

OEMA-2019-145 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 047300-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of manufactured stone installation will be construed as acceptance of substrate and responsibility for results obtained.

3.02. PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work and surfaces from contact with mortar. B. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufactured stone masonry manufacturer’s instructions for type of substrate being covered.

3.03. INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured stone over stud wall sheathing and weather resistive barrier in accordance with the recommendations of the stone supplier, Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry”, all applicable codes and as follows: 1. Dry stacked installation will NOT be allowed. 2. Before application of stone, layout stone to assure a consistent variety of shapes and colors. 3. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which might be visible in the finished work. 4. Clean manufactured stone before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh fillers or abrasives. If not thoroughly wet at time of setting, drench or sponge stone. Do not wet expansion or control joint surfaces. 5. Execute stonework by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at the site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set. 6. Install concealed flashing membrane as shown on drawings. 7. Fasten metal lath, over the weather resistant barrier, to vertical structural members (and concrete unit masonry where shown) with corrosion resistant screws in compliance with ASTM C1063, except fasteners shall penetrate the vertical structural members a minimum of 1 inch (not including the depth of the lath at concrete unit masonry or the depth of lath and sheathing at wood studs) as recommended by the Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry”. a. Install lath with cups pointed upward. b. Stagger all vertical joints in lath. c. Lap all lath edges (vertical and horizontal) a minimum of 1 inch over next lath piece. d. Where manufactured stone masonry substrate is concrete unit masonry at building, fasten lath to masonry with corrosion resistant concrete screws in accordance with ASTM C 1063. e. Where manufactured stone masonry substrate is concrete unit masonry at dumpster enclosure, lath is not required. Scratch coat mortar shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch thick with surface “scratched” horizontally when somewhat firm to create profile for adherence of setting bed mortar. 8. Install clip angles, in accordance with requirements of International Building Code and Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Specifications, to provide anchorage for manufactured stone units that are deeper than 2-5/8 inches. 9. Apply scratch coat to lath (or concrete masonry units at dumpster enclosure) in 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch thickness. Apply scratch coat mortar with sufficient force to key into the lath. Make certain lath is completely covered with mortar. Comply with requirements in manufactured stone manufacturer’s installation instructions. 10. Use a metal scraper to lightly rake horizontal grooves in the scratch coat once mortar is thumbprint hard.

047300-6 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 11. Moist cure scratch coat to reduce cracking. 12. When scratch coat is cured and immediately before applying the manufactured stone veneer, dampen scratch coat so surface appears wet but has no standing water, re-dampen as needed while applying stone. Apply the manufactured stone veneer as follows: a. Mix setting mortar to recommended consistency. Mortar should be “flowable” enough to allow mortar paste to bond with fine pores and capillaries of manufactured stone and scratch coat. Consistency should allow mortar to squeeze out and seal around all the manufactured stone edges. b. Prepare manufactured stone as required. Make certain surfaces are free of dirt, sand or loose particles. If necessary, wash manufactured stone completely. Dampen surface of manufactured stone that is to receive mortar, but do not saturate. Surface should be damp but free of surface water. c. Trowel mortar onto scratch coat a minimum of 1/2” thick. d. Apply thick coat of mortar (nominally 1/2 inch thick) to cover entire back side of manufactured stone, fully back-butter each piece for 100% coverage. e. Press stone into mortar, rotating slightly, forcing some of the mortar to squeeze out. Any mortar forced out beyond the finished point or on the stone surface must be removed with trowel, joint tool or brush before the mortar is allowed to set up. f. When installing corner pieces, alternate long and short legs in opposite directions. g. Frequently check installation for levelness and alignment. h. Use a grout bag or trowel to fill all joints. As mortar stiffens, tool to desired depth and brush off all excess. Do not allow any mortar to harden on the face of the stone. Remove mortar on face of manufactured stone to avoid permanent staining per manufactured stone manufacturer’s instructions. i. Touch up mortar on void areas between manufactured stone pieces, and around windows, doors and openings to conceal cut or trimmed edges per manufactured stone manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturers’ Field Service Representative shall make periodic site visits to review on-going installation procedures and to verify that manufactured stone system is installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

3.05. REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units which do not match adjoining stonework. Provide new matching units, install as specified and seal joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. Reseal defective and unsatisfactory joints and as required to provide a neat, uniform appearance. B. Clean stonework using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers.

3.06. PROTECTION

A. Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures required to protect the stonework from deterioration, discoloration or damage until final acceptance of work. B. Normal weathering of stonework, which will be exposed to the weather after completion, will be acceptable, provided other conditions and activities do not interfere and result in and unacceptable condition.

END 047300.

OEMA-2019-145 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 047300-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes and pipes which are not part of the steel structural framing or other metal systems in other Sections of the Specifications. The items of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Sill plate anchor bolts. b. Steel pipe bollards. c. Supports for solid surface countertops. d. Aluminum ladder. e. Dumpster gate aluminum framing. f. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rails. g. Miscellaneous steel shapes as noted on Drawings. 2. Anchorages of type appropriate to the supporting structure and as required to provide a sturdy installation resistant to all reasonable loads. 3. Cutting, reinforcing, drilling and tapping as required to erect the work and to fit it with work provided under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete fill for bollards and casting of anchorages in concrete ...... Section 033000. 2. Cedar boards for dumpster gate...... Section 062000 3. Finish painting...... Section 099000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication, where possible. Take measurements in time, so as to avoid delaying job progress. Allow for trimming and fitting. B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Qualifications of Welders: Welding operators for shop fabrication shall be qualified, in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualifications Procedure.” D. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. AISI, Steel Products Manual, Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel. 2. ANSI A58.1, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures. 3. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” 4. AWS D1.2 “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.” 5. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.” 6. ASTM B 429 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 7. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 8. ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 9. OSHA: 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders.

OEMA-2019-145 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 10. ANSI A 14.3 Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders. 11. All applicable building codes having jurisdiction.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Shop Drawings: Submit for all miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include reaction loads for attachments of ladders and guard rails. Indicate compliance with referenced standards. 1. Submit shop drawings for: a. Steel bollards. b. Aluminum ladder and accessories. c. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rail. d. Metal frames for dumpster gate.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. PERFORMANCE A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02. MATERIALS A. General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

1. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36, in sizes shown.

2. Steel Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572, Grade 50.

3. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or Type S as selected; Grade A; standard weight (Schedule 40) unless noted otherwise, galvanized per ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft unless otherwise indicated.

5. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304, #4 finish where exposed.

6. Stainless-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 276.

7. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 for round tubing. 8. Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429. B. Fasteners, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum and stainless steel regardless of location. 2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts ASTM A 563; and where indicated, flat washers.

055000-2 METAL FABRICATIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. C. Anchor Bolts: Unfinished threaded fasteners per ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. D. Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc., Hudson, Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382. E. Gate Hardware: All gate hardware shall be stainless steel. If stainless steel hardware is not available, hardware shall be hot dip galvanized. F. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout having a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days and complying with ASTM C 1107. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. “Masterflow 713” by Master Builders Solutions from BASF. 2. “Five Star Grout” by Five Star Products, Inc. 3. “588 Grout-10K” by W.R. Meadows. G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. H. Shop Primer Paint: SSPC Paint #23, Latex Primer, by PPG Pittsburgh Paints, Sherwin-Williams, Rust-Oleum, Tnemec, Valspar, Carbit or Benjamin Moore. I. Touch-Up Paint for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich, inorganic cold galvanizing compound having a minimum of 80% zinc dust in the dry film, such as Carboline Carbozinc 11 Series or Carboweld Series; or Z.R.C. Worldwide Galvilite.

2.03. SHOP FINISH

A. Shop paint all items furnished under this Section, before shipping, unless galvanized and not indicated for finish painting. Apply one coat (except where two coats are recommended by primer manufacturer) of shop paint per Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Painting Application Guide PA 1.

1. Exceptions: a. Surfaces to be welded or bolted with friction-type connections: Do not paint. b. Paint only the initial 2 inches of areas to be embedded in concrete or mortar. c. Provide minimum of two coats of paint on surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish from first coat. 2. Galvanized Items: Shop prime paint the following galvanized items: a. Supports for solid surface countertops. b. All galvanized items that are scheduled for painting in the field.

3. Surface Preparation: After inspection, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat of paint. Clean steel in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) standards as required by paint system to be applied, but not less than the following. a. SP 2 “Hand Tool Cleaning” b. SP 3 “Power Tool Cleaning” c. SP 6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” d. SP 7 “Brush-off Blast Cleaning”

OEMA-2019-145 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and so as to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils per coat. Use methods that will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. B. Galvanizing (exterior items and items in exterior walls): 1. Coating Weights: Items indicated to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized according to the following specifications: a. Assembled steel products: ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. b. Structural steel shapes: ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. c. Steel hardware: ASTM A 153, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. 2. Fabrication: Galvanize only after fabrication. Drilling, welding and other fabrication, except bolting, shall be completed before galvanizing. Welds shall be free of slag and residue. Provide vent holes as required. 3. Quenching: DO NOT QUENCH GALVANIZED ITEMS TO BE PAINTED. Newly galvanized items NOT scheduled for painting shall be passivated in a water quench. 4. Galvanizer's Affidavit: Galvanizer shall inspect galvanizing after dipping and submit notarized affidavit certifying compliance with these specifications. 5. Grade Stamp: Stamp each item, indicating ASTM designation and weight of coating.

2.04. FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Sizes and Thicknesses: As shown, or, if not shown, as required to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished products. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. B. Preassembly in Shop: Preassemble the items in the shop to greatest extent possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Dissimilar Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, insert lead washers, spacers or gaskets between them to provide electrolytic insulation. D. Workmanship: Form exposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp smooth edges. E. Welds: Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of American Welding Society. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.

2.05. FABRICATION SPECIFICS A. Aluminum Ladder: As detailed and noted on drawings and as follows: 1. Acceptable Model & Manufacturer: “No. 502 Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Roofover Rail Extensions” by O’Keeffe’s Inc. with the following accessories: a. “SD” Security Door. b. “OMB” Off-Floor Mounting Bracket. c. “AIB” Additional Intermediate Brackets or “EIB” Extended Intermediate Brackets as required for conditions. 2. Acceptable Other Manufacturers: Comparable models of UPNOVR, Inc. Precision Ladders LLC. 3. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with OSHA 1910.27, ANSI A 14.3 and requirements of state and local authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Material Standards:

055000-4 METAL FABRICATIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO a. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B 209. b. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B 221. 5. Ladder and accessories shall be manufactured by one source and one manufacturer. 6. Components: a. Size: 1'-8" wide, height as shown on drawings. b. Rungs: Shall be 1 1/4” square, tubular aluminum extrusion with serrated slip-resistant surface. Each rung shall withstand 1,500 pound load without deformation or failure. Rungs shall be attached to rails in manner to achieve loading requirements. c. Tubular Side Rails: 1-3/4” by 3” rails consisting of two interlocking aluminum extrusions with minimum1/8” wall thickness. d. Roof Rail Extensions: Extend 3’-6” above roof edge surface and 1’-7” horizontally from face of ladder rail. Rail extension shall be constructed of square serrated tubular grab rails. Rail extension shall be supported entirely from ladder rails, requiring no additional support from the building. e. Construction: Self-locking stainless steel fasteners and full penetration TIG welds. All surfaces shall be clean, smooth and burr-free. f. Offset Brackets: Provide minimum 3/16” thick aluminum offset brackets, attached to ladder, that will attach ladder to wall at distance from wall shown on Drawings. Provide off-floor bracket, top bracket and intermediate brackets to provide support at spacing indicated on Drawings. g. Security Anti-Access Door: 7’-6” tall, formed of 1/8” thick aluminum sheet, security door shall be attached to ladder rail with full height continuous aluminum piano hinge. Door shall have heavy duty forged stainless steel hasp near bottom for locking with padlock by others (see Drawings for padlock hasp height). Locking system shall include mechanism for latching near top of door, without requiring a second padlock, for two point latching. Provide security side panels, mounted to back of ladder rail and extending to within 2 inches of the wall. Security side panels shall be full height of security door. h. Finish: Mill finish. i. Fasteners: Stainless steel fasteners of type and size to attain designed operational and structural performance. Fasteners shall also be of type appropriate to the substrate and compatible with all materials they will be in contact with. j. Warranty: Provide 5 year manufacturer’s warranty against defects in or deterioration of materials and workmanship. B. Dumpster Gate Framing: Metal components as detailed and noted on the drawings, aluminum. C. Bollards (Pipe Guards): 1. Construction: Schedule 80 steel pipe of sizes indicated, hot dip galvanized. 2. Pipe Guards (Bollard) Coverings: Minimum 1/8” thick, high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and cap covering of sizes as shown on drawings. Covers shall not have reflective strips. Provide covers in color as indicated on the Drawings. Acceptable products as supplied by: a. Ideal Shield: Ph: 1-866-825-8659 Email: [email protected] b. Post Guard: Ph: 1-866-737-8900 Email: [email protected]

OEMA-2019-145 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO c. Glass City Plastics: Ph: 1-877-292-8272 Email: [email protected] D. Guard Rails: Contractor’s option to provide natural aluminum or powder coated galvanized steel as follows: 1. Galvanized Steel Rail System: Nominal 1-1/4" steel pipe, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings. Use standard weight and heavy weight pipe as required to withstand loads established by all applicable codes. Design the connections to withstand all uniform and concentrated loads required by codes with: a. Post Receivers: Furnish pipe post sleeves or post hole forms to concrete installers for setting of pipe posts and verify proper placement in formwork; or core the cured concrete to receive the pipe posts. 1) Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc., Hudson, Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382. 2) Pipe Sleeve Material: Same material and finish as pipe rails. b. Finish: Powder coated prime and finish shop coat or, if Owner selected colors not available, powder coat prime shop coat with finish coats by Section 099000 “Painting” Contractor. 2. Aluminum Rail System: Nominal 1-1/2" pipe, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings. Use weights of pipe as required to withstand loads established by all applicable codes. Design the connections to withstand all uniform and concentrated loads required by codes with: a. Post Support: Set railings in aluminum pipe sleeves anchored in concrete using non- shrink setting grout sloped away from railing to provide for water drainage. b. Finish: Natural aluminum finish.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION A. General: Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. B. Joints: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairlines joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. C. Galvanized Items: Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Guard Railings: Set in holes formed with “EZ Sleeves” or in sleeves of matching metal, using non- shrink setting grout. At exterior railings, grout shall be evenly sloped away from railing to provide for water drainage. E. Ladder: Install ladder and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Coordinate bracket and fastener lengths to assure that ladder is anchored to solid backing and is able to support loads as required by applicable codes. F. Bollards: Setting of pipe guards and filling with concrete is specified under Section 033000 “Cast- In-Place Concrete”.

3.02. TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, remove identifying marks, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

055000-6 METAL FABRICATIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness per coat. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, abraded areas and repair with zinc-rich primer applied to 4 mil dry film thickness in accordance with its manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM A 780. Where galvanizing will be exposed to view, top the repair paint with aluminum paint.

END 055000.

OEMA-2019-145 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Wood framing, furring and blocking. 2. Engineered wood beams. 3. Plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) wall sheathing. 4. Plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) roof sheathing. 5. Drainage membrane (for EIFS) / air infiltration barrier. 6. Weather resistive barrier. 7. Hardware for wood framing such as anchors, hangers, straps, etc. 8. Edge blocking for membrane roofing. 9. Framing and blocking for sheet metal work. 10. Furnishing and setting of frames, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry work. 11. Miscellaneous carpentry for protection and for temporary constructions. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete formwork...... Section 033000. 2. Installation of anchor bolts for sill plates ...... Section 033000. 3. Wood trusses, including connectors ...... Section 061753. 4. Batt and blanket insulation ...... Section 072100. 5. Installation of hollow metal door frames...... Section 081113. 6. Non-load bearing metal stud framing...... Section 092116. 7. Curbs for air handling equipment...... See Drawings. 8. Shoring for excavations ...... Section 312000.

1.02. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit technical product data for each manufactured product provided. Include material description, performance characteristics, and installation details and instructions. C. Wood Treatment: Submit certification from treatment plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with specified standards.

1.03. MOCKUP A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to provide air circulation within stacks. B. Delivery of lumber that deviates from grade standards or is in any way defective and inappropriate to its intended use, such as wood with excessive moisture content, loose knots, decay, insect damage, splits and pitch pockets shall not be accepted and shall be immediately removed from the site. C. Deliver pressure treated wood marked to comply with AWPA Quality Mark requirements. Deliver lumber stamped with grade, mark of mill identification, and trademark of association under whose rules the material is produced. D. Handling of Preservative Treated Wood:

OEMA-2019-145 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. According to processors’ suggested safety precautions, including use of impervious gloves and dust masks. 2. Borate pressure treatment is water soluble, exposure to water can leach treatment from wood. Protect preservative treated wood to minimize exposure to water, including condensation, in all phases of construction.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Work Related to Other Trades: 1. Fit carpentry work to work of other trades. Provide furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports as required for proper attachment of the work of other trades. Coordinate with other trades for locations and kinds of blocking required. 2. Furnish lumber and set all wood frames, wood blocks, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry work. 3. Coordinate installation of wood trusses. B. Protection: Provide temporary protections, as specified in this Section and elsewhere in these Specifications, including, but not limited to: 1. Temporary coverings at window and door openings while gypsum board and other finish work is in progress until windows and doors are installed. Arrange closures to permit ventilation. Provide hinged batten doors at exterior door openings. Maintain such protection in good repair until all glass and permanent doors and sash are in place. 2. Temporary railings and barriers around openings and edges of roof, etc. Also, protect around excavations. 3. Temporary sheeting and lumber for protection of doorways, floors and other finish work. 4. Temporary protection for bench marks. Maintain the integrity of permanent benchmarks throughout the Work. C. Coordination: Other trades shall not be allowed to drill or otherwise alter framing so as to diminish its strength or integrity.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Lumber: Worked and graded in accordance with American Lumber Standard PS 20 (U.S. Dep. Comm.), S4S, seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 19% and stamped “S-DRY.” 1. Studs: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings. Use 2x6 size for exterior walls and 2x4 size for interior partitions except as noted otherwise. 2. Headers, Joists, Rough Frames, Framing Sills, etc.: #1 Common Southern Yellow Pine, or equivalent SPF, or Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Nailers at Membrane Roofing and Coping: #1 Common Southern Yellow Pine or equivalent Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Wood veneers laminated with exterior type adhesive; design stresses as indicated on Drawings and as required to meet use intended. C. Wood Furring and Grounds: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, #2 white pine. D. Plywood Sheathing: Type, grade, glue and thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration barrier installation.

061000-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Sheathing: Compliance with standards; product rating, grade and thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration barrier installation. F. Drainage Membrane (for EIFS) / Air Infiltration Barrier (behind EIFS and manufactured stone): “Tyvek CommercialWrap D” by Dupont. 1. Self-Adhered Flexible Flashing: “Tyvek FlexWrap NF” conformable flashing tape for sealing penetrations and for flashing around openings. 2. Self-Adhered Flashing: “StraightFlash” flashing tape for: a. Flashing around openings in flat plane application as recommended by manufacturer in written installation instructions. 3. Provide manufacturer’s recommended joint tape for products used and intended application. G. Weather Resistive Barrier (at manufactured/natural stone veneer and where noted): #15 Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I. H. Sill Sealer: 1/4" thick closed cell neoprene foam gasket sill sealer, width to match stud, equal to “Neoprene Sill Seal” as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.. I. Connector Brackets: 1. Joist Hangers: Size and profile as noted on Drawings or as required to suit application; galvanized finish. 2. Plywood Sheathing Clips: Galvanized steel, Simpson Strong Tie, PSC Series, or equal. 3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM A153 – Class D. J. Nails, Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hardened steel; size and type best suited to conditions; galvanized at exterior locations, food service areas and treated nailers; cement-coated or plain finish ring- shank or twist-shank for other interior locations; size and head to suit application. Drywall screws are not acceptable. 2. Fasteners for Interior Sills: Powder-actuated stud-pins of sufficient length to penetrate concrete floor slabs as noted on Drawings. 3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanizing per the following: a. For Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners: ASTM F 2329. b. For All Other Fasteners: ASTM A 153 – Class D.

2.02. WOOD TREATMENT A. Comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Protection Association (AWPA). B. Wood Preservative Treatment: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type preservative complying with AWPA-U1. 1. Acceptable products include: a. “Advance Guard” by Koppers Performance Chemicals. b. “Sillbor” by Lonza Group. 2. Drying: After pressure treatment, kiln dry the treated wood: a. Lumber to a maximum moisture content of 19%. b. Plywood to a maximum moisture content of 18%. 3. Field Treatment for Holes and Cuts: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type rate as recommended by manufacturer.

OEMA-2019-145 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Grade Marking: Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

5. Scope: Treat all wood members to a retention of 0.17 pcf (B2O3).

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Wood Framing: Comply with recommendations of NFPA “Manual for House Framing,” NFPA “Recommended Nailing Schedule,” and NFPA “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.” Place work accurately, level, plumb and true. 2. Plywood Installation: Comply with recommendations of APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," including current revisions. 3. Execute rough carpentry in a manner to achieve greatest stability. 4. Discard material with defects that might impair the strength or accuracy of the work, including wane, twist, bends and warp. 5. Do not shim sills, joists, short studs, trimmers, headers, lintels or other framing components. B. Treated Wood: 1. Brush apply 2 coats of the specified preservative treatment on cuts, holes and site-sawn ends. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. C. Stud Framing: 1. Space the studs 16" o.c. except as indicated otherwise. Extend partition studs to the structure above. 2. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates of matching 2x material; except single top plate may be used for non-load bearing partitions. Joints in top plates shall be lapped at least 6"; do not join over wall openings. 3. At exterior walls, anchor the bottom plate with foundation bolts over sill sealer. 4. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. 5. Space jack studs over door and window frames at same spacing as partition studs. 6. See Drawings for additional framing requirements at openings. D. Joist Framing: 1. Crowns: Install with crown edge up. 2. End Support: Not less than 1-1/2" of bearing on wood or metal, nor less than 3" on masonry. Attach joists to wooden bearing sills by toenailing or metal connectors. Butt connections shall be hung with metal connectors. Notches cut for bearing shall not exceed one-fourth the joist’s depth. 3. Openings: Frame with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers, doubling headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 ft. 4. Drilling and Notching for Conduits: Do not notch in middle third of joists; otherwise, limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist or locate closer than 2" from top or bottom. 5. End Blocking: Provide solid 2x blocking, the depth of joist, at ends of joist unless joist is nailed to header or band member. 6. Bridging: Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth-to-thickness ratio of joist exceeds 4. Place bridging in continuous rows at intervals of 8 ft. Make bridging with bevel

061000-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO cut 1x4 or 2x3 wood bracing, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists; or use solid 2x material of same depth as joist, end nailed to joist. E. Nailers and Blocking Within Walls and Partitions: 1. Provide wherever required for attachment of work of other trades. Cut and fit as required for true line and level of work to be attached. 2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Bolts and nuts shall be countersunk flush with surfaces. F. Plywood or OSB Wall Sheathing: 1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work, using hot-dip galvanized 6d ring shank or threaded nails 6" o.c. at panel edges and 12" o.c. at intermediate framing, unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to satisfy design loads. a. Install wood-based sheathing to maintain 1/8" space between end and edge joints of sheets on walls. This joint spacing requirement is especially critical where manufactured stone masonry is being installed. 2. Install panels with all edges over solid framing. G. Plywood or OSB Roof Sheathing: 1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work. a. Nail the roof sheathing at the perimeter of roof with 10 penny nails at 6” o.c., unless otherwise noted on Drawings or otherwise required to meet design loads for roof system. 2. Before laying panels, verify that surface to be covered is an even plane and framing members are not twisted or bent. Add blocking as required and shim as required to provide a smooth, flat plane on which panels may be nailed. 3. Nail panels to framing with hot-dip galvanized 8d rink shank or threaded nails at 6" o.c. along edges and 12" o.c. elsewhere unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to meet design loads for roof system. Drive nails tight to panel faces. 4. Edge joints perpendicular to the direction of framing shall be supported halfway between framing members with metal edge clips. 5. Install panels perpendicular to framing, with all edges supported on solid framing as noted on drawings. Tongue and groove panels may be allowed in lieu of solid blocking at interlocked panel edges in certain areas as noted on Drawings. Stagger joints and maintain a 1/8" gap between roof sheathing sheets. H. Roof Nailers: Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the single-ply membrane roof, at the base of roof projections, around roof penetrations and as required otherwise. 1. Roof nailers shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ED-1, FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, and in accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer’s requirements, whichever is more stringent, for design loads and uplift pressures indicated on Drawings.

3.02. INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE MEMBRANE / AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Prior to installation of air infiltration barrier, verify that 1/8” gap between plywood sheathing panels (at end and edge joints) is present. If 1/8” gap is no longer present, rout joints to achieve 1/8” gap. B. Apply the air infiltration barrier material over sheathing on exterior walls, providing a barrier to water intrusion as well as a barrier to air passage. 1. Install air infiltration barrier in one layer on entire exterior surface of exterior wall sheathing.

OEMA-2019-145 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Install barrier with grooves oriented vertically. 3. Attach with air infiltration barrier manufacturer’s recommended fasteners and washers based on material of framing. C. Install air infiltration barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s latest printed instructions. Do not use building paper or bitumen impregnated felts except for secondary layers where indicated.

D. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls. Lap the joints of the air infiltration barrier, higher course over lower course. 1. Provide 6 inch overlap at all terminations, seams, penetrations and transitions to maintain a continuous downward drainage plane and weather barrier. 2. Seal all seams, terminations and penetrations with manufacturer’s approved tape in order to create a continuous air infiltration barrier. E. Assure a thorough air seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the sheathing. 1. Before placing air infiltration barrier over openings, cover edges of sheathing with self- adhered flexible flashing strips without making joints at the corners of the opening. 2. Apply air infiltration barrier over openings. Then make an “I” cut in the air infiltration barrier and wrap it around the jambs and window sills. Tape over all cut edges. 3. Tack and staple the air infiltration barrier (Tyvek) as required to keep it in place until finish systems can be installed.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Install two separate layers of weather resistive barrier material over air infiltration barrier on portion of exterior walls to receive manufactured stone veneer in accordance with weather resistive barrier manufacturer’s printed instructions and as indicated in manufactured stone veneer manufacturer’s printed installation guide. B. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls; working up the wall, apply upper courses such that the bottom edge overlaps the top edge of the course below. Install two separate layers of weather resistive barrier. Alter size of bottom course in second layer to offset joints between the two layers. Apply horizontally with a minimum 2-inch overlap and a minimum 6-inch end lap; securely fasten to substrate with galvanized staples or galvanized roofing nails. Inside and outside corners must be overlapped a minimum of 16 inches past the corner in both directions. C. Where weather resistive barrier does not extend to the top of the wall, lap air infiltration barrier over top edge of weather resistive barrier layers. Outer/lapping course of air infiltration barrier must extend to top of wall, as described in paragraph B above, to maintain barrier seal. D. Assure a thorough seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the sheathing. E. Apply weather resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back weather resistive barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing at manufactured stone veneer with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.

END 061000.

061000-6 ROUGH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES SECTION 061753 - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Factory fabricated wood roof trusses. 2. Temporary bridging between trusses. 3. Erection of wood trusses, including erection hardware. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Wood stud walls and roof sheathing...... Section 061000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory stamps shall be clearly visible on finished products. B. Design Standards (most current edition): 1. American National Standards Institute / American Wood Council “ANSI/AWC NDS - National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction” and it’s “Supplement.” 2. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) “TCM - Timber Construction Manual.” 3. American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute “ANSI/TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction.” C. Fabricator’s Qualifications: TPI member in good standing, participating in TPI Quality Control Test Criteria Program or equivalent program which inspects all phases of truss fabrication including lumber storage, fabrication equipment and fabrication processes.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Test Data: Submit reports of truss performance tests as may be applicable to the Work. C. Shop Drawings: Include: 1. Truss framing elevations; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress increase; force analysis of each member; pitch, span and spacing of trusses. 2. Nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joints; gauge thickness; bearing and anchorage details. 3. Permanent bracing and bridging. 4. Truss designer’s recommendations for erection and handling. 5. Seal of Structural Engineer registered in the state in which the Project resides, along with copies of manufacturer’s design analyses.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in SBCA BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

OEMA-2019-145 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Store trusses flat, off the ground with adequate support to prevent lateral bending. Protect from weather and provide air circulation around stacks and under covers. C. Remove trusses that have been subjected to bending and other loads sufficient to weaken connections. Replace with new trusses except as approved otherwise by manufacturer and Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Roof trusses shall be as manufactured by Alpine Engineered Products (div. of ITW Building Components Group), Cascade Mfg. Co., or equal.

2.02. MATERIALS A. Lumber: WWPA, WCLB, SPIB or NLGA graded softwood lumber, S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS 20, stress rated as required for loads imposed. B. Connection Plates: ASTM A 446, Grade A steel; minimum 20-gauge (.036" thick); G-60 galvanized per ASTM A 525 or AZ 50 aluminum-zinc alloy coated per ASTM A 792.

2.03. FABRICATION A. Ensure that members are accurately cut to length, angle and true to line, ensuring tight joints. B. Joints shall all be set with jigs for uniformity and accuracy. C. All joints shall be sound, tight and securely fastened upon delivery to site.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. ERECTION A. Comply with recommendations of American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute ANSI/TPI 1 “National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction” manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Set and secure wood trusses level, plumb and in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other Sections. C. Ensure that truss ends have sufficient bearing area. D. Do not impose onto trusses any loads for which they were not designed. E. Cutting and altering of members will not be permitted. F. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. G. Furnish and install truss manufacturer’s recommended permanent bridging.

END 061753.

061753-2 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITIES SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Finish carpentry work of every character, including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Install standing and running trim in dining areas. b. Glazing stops for openings in interior partitions. c. Interior paneling for walls. d. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) panels and trim. e. Cedar lumber boards for dumpster enclosure gate (Owner’s choice). f. Furnish and install gate hardware. g. Solid surface finished window stools, vanity tops and shelves. h. Plastic laminate construction as noted on Drawings. i. Removal of hardware prior to and reinstallation after painting. 2. Installation of toilet accessories, both those provided as part of this contract and those provided by Owner. 3. Installation of Artwork, provided by Owner. 4. Installation of Food Service Cabinet bases, provided by Food Service Equipment Contractor. 5. Installation of miscellaneous Food Service Items as noted on drawing FS-1, provided by Owner. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Wood grounds and concealed wood blocking...... Section 061000. 2. Vapor retarder on interior of exterior wall studs ...... Section 072100. 3. Plastic laminate-faced doors, some hardware installation...... Section 081513. 4. Installation of hardware on aluminum doors...... Section 084113. 5. Furnishing & installation of finish hardware not installed by door mfr..Section 087100. 6. Standards for installing door hardware...... Section 087100. 7. Finish painting and staining, except back-priming specified herein ...... Section 099000. C. Related Work By Others: 1. Owner will furnish and install all items of furniture and furnishings, unless specifically noted on drawings, including trash receptacles for trash cabinets in Men's and Women's Rooms. 2. Owner will furnish and install all metal storage shelving not furnished by food service contractor. 3. Food Service Contractor will furnish standing and running trim for dining areas.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise noted or specified, comply with “Custom Grade” provisions of Architectural Woodwork Institute’s (AWI) “Architectural Woodwork Standards,” current edition. B. Measurements: Before proceeding with millwork to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and Shop Drawing details as required for accurate fit. C. Workmen: Use only tradesmen experienced in the installation of millwork. D. Regulatory Requirements: Attachment of toilet accessories shall comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility

OEMA-2019-145 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 and with the Accessibility Code of the state in which the project resides. E. Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers: Comply with SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District) Rule 1168.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Submit Samples under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Samples: Upon request, submit Samples of each of the following items: 1. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Three finished 8" square samples of each type and surface finish, in colors selected. 2. Paneling: Three finished 8" x 10" square samples of each type and 6” length of each trim shape. 3. Solid Surface: Three 6 inch square samples with at least one edge showing edge profile to be provided. 4. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) panels and trim. C. Shop Drawings for Solid Surface Materials: Submit fully dimensioned shop drawings showing vanity tops, window stools, shelves, etc. layouts, joinery, terminating conditions, substrate construction, cutouts and holes. Show plumbing installation provisions. Include elevations, section details, and large scale details. D. Maintenance: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning and maintenance instructions for each finish material.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until painting, wet work, sanding and grinding have been completed in installation areas and relative humidity in those rooms can be maintained between 25% and 55% until Final Acceptance. C. Store materials in manner recommended by manufacturer to avoid staining, warping or other damage to materials.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Advise Contractor of the temperature and humidity required to be maintained in order to hold moisture content of finish carpentry within 1% of the optimum moisture content required until Final Acceptance.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. WOOD BASED MATERIALS A. General: Interior woodwork shall be AWI Premium Grade, unless otherwise indicated, of an average moisture content within the range of 5% to 10%. B. Paneling: Prefinished type as noted on drawings. 1. Adhesive: Titebond construction adhesive of type recommended by panel manufacturer for type of substrate. 2. Trim: Aluminum trim, with anodized silver finish, in shapes as provided by panel manufacturer for each separate edge condition. All panel edges shall be covered with aluminum panel trim or wood trim as detailed on Drawings. C. Cedar Gate Boards: NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA, C and Better Clear western red cedar, surfaced four sides (S4S), maximum 15% moisture content.

062000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2.02. PLASTIC MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA type Ld3. 1. Exposed Faces: .028" thick (+ .004") vertical-surface, high pressure type (GP28 Grade); in colors/patterns listed on drawings: 2. Edging: Plastic laminate, to match exposed faces. 3. Adhesive: Waterproof; use type recommended by laminate manufacturer. Products made with urea-formaldehyde or melamine-formaldehyde must comply with HPMA Standard FTM 2 for emissions. B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: 3/32” thick fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels type as noted on drawings by Marlite, Class A. 1. Provide matching trim for joints, corners and exposed edges. 2. Adhesive: Panel manufacturer’s recommended adhesive based on substrate type. 3. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing or acid-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." C. Solid Surface Material: 1. Cast, non-porous, homogeneous solid sheets of filled acrylic resin, not coated, not laminated and not of composite construction, complying with ICPA SS-1 and the following: a. Through body colors and patterns. b. Superficial damage to a depth of 1/32 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. c. Manufacturer and Color: As noted on Drawings. d. Material Thickness: As noted on Drawings but not less than 1/2 inch. e. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and CSA B45.5 / IAPMO Z124, without a precoated finish. 2. Joint Adhesive: Methacrylate-based adhesive for chemically bonding solid surfacing seams. Color complementary to solid surfacing sheet material. UL 2818 GREENGUARD Gold certified and complies with SCAQMD Rule 1168. a. Product: “Wilsonart Hard Surface Adhesive.” 3. Siliconized Acrylic Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex sealant. For general applications to fill gaps between countertops and at terminating substrates. Complies with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF, and SCAQMD Rule 1168. a. Product: “Wilsonart Color Matched Caulk”. b. Color: Complementary to solid surfacing color selected from sealant manufacturer’s standard offerings. 4. Construction Adhesive: Countertop manufacturer’s recommended silicone-based construction adhesive for backsplashes and endsplashes (if included in the project), and other applications according to manufacturer’s published fabrication instructions. 5. Trash Grommet: Provide satin stainless steel finished #TM1B-SSS stainless steel trash grommet as manufactured by Doug Mockett and Company, Inc.

2.03. FASTENERS A. Nails: Ring-shank or rough coated finish, size and type to suit application. Non-ferrous or hot dip galvanized for exterior. B. Interlocking Mechanical Fasteners: Conforming to 400B-S-8.A or 1600B-S-4.A or to Sections 14 and 25 of the Woodwork Institute of California’s manual of millwork; corrosion resistant finish.

2.04. SHOP FABRICATION A. General: Locate loose joints so as to render them as inconspicuous as possible in the finished work.

OEMA-2019-145 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Solid Surfacing: Shop fabricate solid surface items in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Rout ends for ease of scribing in the field. 2. Rout holes and cutouts, shown on Drawings, and complete by sanding all edges smooth. 3. Where solid surface material has plywood backing, seal plywood backing with varnish at sink and trash cutouts. Install stainless steel grommet in trash cutout. C. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. The reverse side of trim members shall be routed out or grooved (backed out), except for members with ends exposed in the finished work. 2. Members shall be single lengths except as approved otherwise by Owner, and then shall be tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting millwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected and approved prior to commencement of installation. C. Condition the wood items and paneling to the temperature and humidity conditions of the installation areas a minimum of 48 hours before installing. Temperature and humidity of installation areas shall be the same as final building operation conditions.

3.02. INSTALLATION A. General: Secure work to grounds and blocking as required, holding to correct surfaces, lines and levels. Make finished work flat, plumb, and true. Install items tight to adjoining surfaces except as approved otherwise. Cope and scribe for tight fits. 1. Fastening: Conceal fastenings; where not possible, locate them in inconspicuous places. Where nailing is permitted through woodwork face, conceal nail heads. Do not nail adjacent woodwork to paneling. 2. Miter external corner of flat horizontal members; house internal corners. Miter external corners of molded members; cope internal corners. Glue mitered corners; secure with corrugated metal fasteners. 3. Thoroughly sand finished wood items smooth. Touch up edges and make smooth. B. Millwork: 1. Install millwork in a manner consistent with the specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. 2. Install running trim in maximum lengths; do not use short pieces or splicing of scraps. Bevel splices and join only where solid fastenings can be made. Make all joints tight. Offset joints between adjacent members. 3. Sink nail heads 1/16" deep in running trim, using nail set. Fill with putty stained so that it will blend in with surrounding surfaces after application of the specified varnishes. Countersink screw heads and cover with matching wood plug sanded flush. C. Paneling: Comply with requirements of most current editions of ANSI/NEMA LD3 and AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. Install as shown and noted on drawings. 1. Trim panels to fit while allowing for expansion and contraction. Joints between panels and between panels and dissimilar materials must allow a minimum of 1/8 inch for panel

062000-4 FINISH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO movement to avoid stress cracking of panels. Allow additional space for movement where recommended by panel manufacturer. Holes for fasteners shall be predrilled and oversized. 2. Cut and install trim as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply adhesive to back of panels at rate, and using trowel of size, as recommended by panel and adhesive manufacturers to achieve 100% coverage. Adhere paneling to substrate and roll face of panel to remove air pockets. D. Solid Surfacing: 1. Install solid surface material level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 2. Fasten vanities and shelves by screwing through support frames and brackets into underside of top. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Where joints cannot be avoided, align adjacent surfaces and, using seam adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. a. Install backsplashes and endsplashes (if included in the project) to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 3. Scribe ends of window stools to window jamb with minimum 1/8 inch for expansion space at each jamb. Fill expansion space with specified sealant. Fix in place with sufficient waterproof construction adhesive to resist prying off with a 300-pound weight on the end of a 30" crow bar. 4. Completed work to be plumb, level and true with edges eased and sanded smooth. E. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panel Installation: 1. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. 2. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. 3. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 5. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. 7. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails. Do not fasten through panels. 8. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. 9. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. 10. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Attach all toilet accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations shown. Secure each item in accordance with its manufacturer’s instructions for each type of substrate construction, except as specified otherwise. 1. Anchor only into solid wood blocking. 2. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. B. Grab Bars: Install bars at proper dimensions above floor to comply with accessible facilities standards. Install all grab bars with a maximum nominal clearance of 1–1/2" between bar and wall. Attachment of grab bars shall support a minimum load of 250 pounds downward force.

OEMA-2019-145 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.04. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Repair damaged or defective work. B. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. C. Clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces according to surface manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove excess adhesives, sealants, and similar materials. D. Clean plastic laminate and paneling with a damp cloth or ordinary bar-soap and water. Harsh abrasive cleansers must not be used. More stubborn dirt, greasy fingerprints, glue spills, etc. shall be removed as recommended by plastic laminate and paneling manufacturers.

3.05. PROTECTION A. Protect installed finish carpentry from damage by other trades until Owner’s acceptance of the work.

END 062000.

062000-6 FINISH CARPENTRY OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 072100 – BUILDING INSULATION

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Rigid perimeter foundation insulation. 2. Rigid continuous wall insulation (if included in the project). 3. Blanket and batt insulation for walls, partitions and where shown. 4. Blanket and batt insulation above ceilings. 5. Rigid insulation for cooler and freezer floors. 6. Vapor retarder at exterior walls. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Preparation of concrete to receive insulation...... Section 033000. 2. Insulation for membrane roofing ...... Section 075419. 3. Gypsum board to enclose vapor retarder ...... Section 092116. 4. Backfilling over foundation insulation ...... Section 312000.

1.02. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications for each type of insulation required.

1.03. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. C. Insulation shall bear manufacturer’s label or stamp.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Rigid Perimeter Foundation and Continuous Wall Insulation: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation in thicknesses noted on Drawings, complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer’s standard sizes. 1. Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.4. 2. Minimum compressive strength: 25 psi. 3. Maximum water absorption: 0.3% by volume. B. Rigid Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation, thickness per Drawings, complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, in manufacturer’s standard sizes. 1. Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.0.

OEMA-2019-145 BUILDING INSULATION 072100-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Minimum compressive strength: 60 psi. 3. Maximum water absorption: 0.3% by volume. C. Batt Insulation: 1. Thermal Insulation / Fireblocking for Exterior Stud Walls – Non-Fire Rated (concealed within framing, at roof curbs and where shown): Unfaced blankets of glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A. Provide blankets of thickness to match stud depth and with minimum R-value as noted on Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Knauf Insulation EcoBatt “R-21 HD”. b. Owens Corning Insulating Systems “Thermal Batt Fiberglas Insulation”. c. Johns Manville “Unfaced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation”. d. CertainTeed Saint-Gobain “Fiber Glass Thermal and Acoustical Building Insulation”. 2. Thermal Insulation to cover exposed Continuous Insulation (exposed on face of studs above ceiling): FSK-faced, thickness as required to provide minimum R-value as noted on Drawings, ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective membrane covering), Class A (0-25 flame spread), Category 1 (membrane is vapor retarder). a. FSK faced batts, UL listed for Fire Hazard Classification (FHC) of 25/50 and intended for exposed applications. b. Permeance of Facing: ASTM E 96, less than or equal to 0.19 perms. c. Provide manufacturer’s recommended tape for joints in FSK faced batt insulation that maintains UL rating, maintains permeance requirements and adheres to all surfaces being taped. d. Provide “FSK-25” as manufactured by Jonhs Manville or comparable products meeting specified requirements by one of the following: CertainTeed Saint-Gobain, Owen Corning Insulating Systems, Knauf Insulation. 3. Acoustical Insulation / Fireblocking for Interior Partitions: Unfaced blankets of glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A. Provide blankets of thickness to match stud depth. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Knauf Insulation EcoBatt “R-21 HD”. b. Owens Corning Insulating Systems “Thermal Batt Fiberglas Insulation”. c. Johns Manville “Unfaced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation”. d. CertainTeed Saint-Gobain “Fiber Glass Thermal and Acoustical Building Insulation”.

2.02. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Perimeter Insulation: Type recommended by the insulation manufacturer for substrate indicated. B. Vapor Retarder (if required, see Drawings): Clear low-density polyethylene film at least 6 mils (.006") thick, having a vapor resistance no larger than 0.19 perms. 1. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarder securely to substrates indicated. Verify compatibility with continuous insulation. 3. Vapor Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. C. Fasteners for Insulation used as Fireblocking: Screw attached, angle-shaped, spindle-type anchors consisting of angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness

072100-2 BUILDING INSULATION OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO securely in position with self-locking washer of minimum 1” diameter / square. “90-Degree Insulation Hangers” manufactured by Gemco; 90° Insulation Angle Hanger” by AGM Industries, Inc.or product approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. General: Extend insulation full thickness shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. B. Rigid Perimeter Foundation Insulation: 1. Apply insulation to the inside of exterior foundation walls, from under the floor slab down to the top of the footing. 2. Butt joints tightly. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Apply insulation with adhesive directly to concrete so as to hold it in place until backfilling is complete. 3. Replace insulation damaged by backfilling or any other operation, at no additional charge to Owner. C. Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors: 1. Apply insulation in 2 courses, alternating joints at least 8" between courses. 2. Keep joints tight, including intersections with walls. 3. Carefully cut for penetrations, keeping insulation tight to penetrating pipes. D. Blanket and Batt Insulation: 1. Provide batts of appropriate width to fit in stud spaces tightly. Batts shall extend full height of wall, full width of roof curb, and completely fill all spaces indicated to receive batt insulation leaving no voids. 2. Install acoustical insulation in interior partition stud spaces where indicated. Insulation shall extend full height of wall and fill all voids. Place insulation behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. 3. Penetrations at ducts or structural framing, cut insulation shall be stuffed all around with acoustical insulation. 4. Electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations shall be surrounded with acoustical insulation extending 12" around the opening. 5. Fill control joints with insulation. 6. Where batt insulation has FSK facing acting as a vapor retarder, install batts with vapor retarder at interior side of insulation at all exterior walls as shown on drawings. Lap facing / flanges and seal with manufacturer’s recommended tape. Cover all fastener penetrations and repair all punctures and tears with tape. Fit vapor retarder tight around all pipes, conduits and other penetrations and seal with tape. 7. Where batt insulation is used for fireblocking within walls, batts must be installed in a manner causing them to be securely retained in place. Install ‘90 degree’ type insulation hangers with mechanical fasteners to studs on each side of insulation to be held in place. Space insulation hangers at no more than 6” vertically.

OEMA-2019-145 BUILDING INSULATION 072100-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Rigid Continuous Wall Insulation: 1. Attach rigid continuous wall insulation to interior face of exterior wall studs, extending from top of floor slab to bottom of roof deck. 2. Butt joints tightly. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Install insulation, with manufacturers recommended method of attachment, directly to wood studs so as to hold it in place until vapor retarder and gypsum board can be installed. 3. Exposure: Rigid continuous insulation cannot remain exposed. Unless detailed to be covered by another material, all rigid continuous insulation shall be covered by vapor retarder and 5/8 inch thick gypsum wall board.

3.03. VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Install a vapor retarder sheet, if required or shown on drawings, to provide a continuous vapor retarder enclosure (including connection to vapor retarder at roof deck) around the occupied spaces. B. Install vapor retarder at location within exterior wall construction as indicated on Drawings. C. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarder in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. D. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarder by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor retarder tape according to vapor retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarder with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder material. G. Exposure: Vapor retarder cannot remain exposed. Unless detailed to be covered by another material, all vapor retarder shall be covered by 5/8 inch thick gypsum wall board on interior and 5/8 inch thick plywood sheathing on exterior.

END 072100.

072100-4 BUILDING INSULATION OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. A weather-tight drainable type exterior insulating and finish system (EIFS) for wall surface, trim and accent featuring the following components: a. Moisture drainage membrane (See Section 061000). b. Insulation board base and shapes to receive finish coating system. c. Reinforcing mesh and edge trims. d. Synthetic, stucco-like finish. e. Control joint and perimeter joint sealant work. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Stud framing, sheathing & air infiltration barrier/drainage membrane ...Section 061000. 2. Other building insulations ...... Section 072100. 3. Metal coping ...... Section 076200. 4. Joint sealant standards ...... Section 079200.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. System Manufacturer: Shall have marketed the exterior insulation and finish system in the United States for at least 5 years and have at least 1,000 completed projects. 2. Installer Qualifications: EIFS installer shall be certified in writing by EIFS system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source of Supply: All materials used shall be products of the system manufacturer or shall be approved by the system manufacturer for the application applied. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Manufacturer’s Inspection: a. Regularly during the course of construction, work shall be inspected by system manufacturer’s authorized representative for conformance to manufacturer’s requirements. b. System manufacturer’s representative shall have free access to all areas of EIFS work including staging, storage and mixing rooms. 2. Specifications and Instructions: System manufacturer’s specifications, including installation instructions, shall be available at the job site at all times. 3. State Code Evaluation Services’ Report: Report on the system shall be available at the job site at all times. D. Approvals, Listing and Classifications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories: Insulation board, with finish system, shall be classified by UL as having a flame spread not more than 25 and smoke development index not more than 450 when tested per ASTM E 84. 2. Factory Mutual: Entire insulation and finish system shall be approved by FM and conform to the listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

OEMA-2019-145 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. System shall be a water drainable system listed as an approved product by State Code. E. Tests: System shall have been tested for moisture resistance, absorption-freeze, accelerated weathering, mildew resistance, salt spray resistance, chemical resistance, and abrasion resistance. 1. Impact Resistance: System shall have passed full scale tests per EIMA 101. 2. Wind Load: System shall have passed full scale tests per ASTM E 330 respectively. 3. Fire: System shall have achieved the Modified ASTM E 108: Flame height less than 6 feet.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data describing all products to be used in the application. 1. Manufacturer’s Application Instructions: Where manufacturer provides options, indicate which option will be used for the work. 2. Color Charts: For all ancillary materials that will be exposed in finish work, submit charts with complete range of colors for selection by Architect and as noted on drawings, including joint sealant. C. Shop Drawings: Submit details showing the following: 1. Jointing and fastenings. Show limits of finish coat at joints. 2. Dimensions and profile of insulation shapes for cornice. D. Samples:

1. EIFS: Based on custom color selections indicated on Drawings, submit 2 samples 12" x 12" of each finish, color and texture to be considered for installation, using same tools and techniques, as for actual Project. Include in each sample panel a typical routed “EIFS reveal” if reveals are included in the project. 2. Color and Texture: Adjust submittal and resubmit panels until approved. E. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and for Installer. 1. Provide written documentation, from EIFS system manufacturer, of EIFS Installers certification as a qualified installer of manufacturer’s EIFS system proposed for this project. F. Test Reports: Upon request, submit 3 copies of test reports performed on the EIFS.

1.04. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Deliver all materials to installation site in original unopened and undamaged packaging with labels intact. B. Labeling of Insulation Boards: Boards shall bear UL label, name of raw material used and name of molder. C. Store all materials protected from sunlight and weather at temperatures not less than 40°F at all times. D. Vinyl Accessories: Protect from elements, keep clean and do not allow shape of units to be deformed prior to installation.

072400-2 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Ambient Air Temperature: 1. 40°F or greater and rising at the time of installation of the system coatings and shall remain at 40°F or greater for at least 24 hours after application. 2. Temperatures below 40°F: Supplemental heat, including heat-containing enclosures, shall be furnished when the ambient temperature falls below 40°F; and heat shall be maintained to keep applied materials above 40°F until they are properly cured. B. Weather Damage: Schedule work to avoid damage from sunlight and wet weather, especially with respect to insulation boards and coating. C. Scheduling: Schedule sufficient workers and equipment so that each area of work finished may be concluded free of cold joints, scaffolding line, etc. D. Protection: The system, especially open joints, shall be protected from the intrusion of water at all times.

1.07. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Exterior Insulation Finish System manufacturer shall provide an 8-year written warranty against defective materials.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS AND SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design: Standard Watermaster LCR-GX EIFS Class PB Drainage System as manufactured by Parex USA, Inc. Provide basis of design product or Architect approved comparable product of Dryvit Systems, Inc., or Senergy of BASF Wall Systems Group. B. The EIFS shall be applied in-place at the site on the substrates indicated.

2.02. MATERIALS A. Drainage Membrane: As specified in Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry.” B. Insulation Type: Grooved back expanded polystyrene boards meeting EIMA guideline specifications and specifications of system manufacturer and meeting approval of EIFS manufacturer. 1. Fire Rating: Flame spread less than or equal to 25 and smoke development less than or equal to 450 when tested per ASTM E 84. 2. Size: Maximum 2'-0" x 4'-0". 3. Thickness: 2" and as otherwise shown. Special shapes shall be cut from whole blocks of dimensionally stabilized insulation except as otherwise allowed by system manufacturer. C. Insulation Fasteners: 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturers standard, having thermal barrier cap over the head of the fastener. Include manufacturer’s anti-corrosion coated screws suitable for anchoring to wood studs. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Typical fiberglass reinforcement mesh, corner and reinforcement mesh, edge and light impact resistant reinforcing mesh: Minimum 4.5 ounce; treated to be alkali resistant, moisture resistant, and to bond to base coat material, acceptable to exterior insulation finish system manufacturer and as required for specified warranty. E. Base Coat: Non-cementitious, 100% acrylic copolymer emulsion-based ground coat that is ready for use without adding other materials. F. Finish Coat: An acrylic-based, factory-mixed coating manufactured by system manufacturer, having integral color and texture:

OEMA-2019-145 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Texture: Medium sand finish. 2. Colors: Custom colors as listed on drawings. G. Aggregates for Finish Coat: Natural and/or machine made sands washed free of iron and chemical deposits and otherwise free of deleterious substances. H. Water: Clear and potable. I. Vinyl Accessories: Starter track / casing, with perforations for drainage, shall be extruded vinyl, exterior grade materials conforming to ASTM D 4216 and as approved by EIFS manufacturer. 1. Starter track / casing shall have perforations on the bottom for drainage with removable tape to protect perforations during application of finish. 2. Face of starter track / casing shall have perforations for keying of and ridges for adhesion of the finishing compound. 3. EIFS Starter Track / Casing (without drip edge), Model #AMST-**** with drainage holes, as manufactured by Amico Building Products or comparable product acceptable to EIFS manufacturer. J. Joint Sealant: 1. EIFS manufacturer’s recommended silicone or StPe based liquid sealant tested per EIMA Standard 300.01 and exhibiting 50% elongation after conditioning. 2. Sealants recommended by EIFS manufacturer for type of joint and materials involved, based on testing. 3. Provide sealant with guaranteed 20-year life; colors as selected by Architect from sealant manufacturer’s standard options. 4. Backer Rods: Include closed-cell polyethylene or extruded polyolefin foam backer rods having non-absorbing skin as well as bond breaker tape. 5. Backer Rod Sizes: Provide sizes that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint and will minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. 6. Priming: Include sealant primers as required and recommended.

2.03. MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Equipment: Use only equipment approved by system manufacturer. B. Materials: Mix only such materials as are approved by manufacturer and only in quantities recommended by manufacturer. Use no accelerants, retarders, fillers or other additives. C. Procedures: Carefully follow manufacturer’s recommended procedures for mixing. D. Pot Life: Use materials immediately after being mixed.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION & PREPARATION A. Substrate: Prior to installation of the EIFS, the substrate shall be examined for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements. Report any substandard conditions, to Architect for determination of how substrate shall be made compliant. B. Soundness: The substrate shall be examined for soundness, such as tightness of connections, crumbling or looseness of surface, voids and projections, etc. C. Dryness: The substrate shall be tested using a moisture meter to determine if it meets manufacturer’s requirements for moisture content and shall show no evidence of retaining moisture. D. Flatness: The substrate shall be flat with no offsets greater than 1/4 inch in any 4 ft. distance.

072400-4 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.02. APPLICATION OF VINYL ACCESSORIES A. Vinyl starter track casing shall be attached with lath nails or screws per ASTM C 1063. Components shall be attached directly to studs. B. All butt joints, intersections and ends of vinyl components shall be joined, embedded and sealed in compatible sealant approved by vinyl accessory and EIFS manufacturers. C. Remove tape (protecting drainage openings) after finish coats are completed.

3.03. APPLICATION OF DRAINAGE MEMBRANE A. Refer to Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for the installation of the moisture drainage membrane.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. General: Apply insulation boards to substrate with mechanical fasteners. Methods of installation and minimum penetration into framing members shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer and approved by for the substrate indicated. B. Joints: Apply insulation boards horizontally, with grooves vertical and vertical joints offset between courses by at least 6". Butt joints tightly. Interlock board joints at corners. Align drainage grooves in boards. 1. Remove edges of boards degraded by sunlight. 2. At penetrations, offset board joints at least 6" from edge of penetration. 3. Offset insulation boards with respect to substrate joints by at least 8", except at control joints and expansion joints which shall be aligned. 4. Assure that all joints are tight. Rout out poorly fit joints and fill gaps with tight fitting slivers taken from insulation boards or use approved foam-in-place seal to fill joints. Filling joints with non-foam products will not be allowed. 5. Cut insulation back at caulked joints so that AFTER installation of base coat and mesh, the joint width will be the dimension shown. C. Expansion Joints: Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at the following locations in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations: 1. At building expansion joints. 2. At substrate expansion joints. 3. At floor lines in wood frame construction. 4. Where EIFS abuts other materials. 5. Where significant structural movement occurs, such as at changes in roof line or changes in building shape and/or structural system. 6. Where substrate changes. D. Ensure that edges are straight, plumb and true. E. Shape backs of insulation boards as required to make way for any conduits, bracket mounts, etc. so as to allow insulation to lay tight to the substrate. F. Drip Bottoms: Form a positive drip at bottom of panels where suspended in space, such as at window heads. Profiles other than those shown may be used provided that the panel sight lines remain as shown. G. EIFS Reveal Joints (if included in project): Cut out lines as indicated, maintaining an insulation thickness of at least 3/4". Use jigs and straightedges as required for correct placement, accurate and true lines.

OEMA-2019-145 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO H. Provision for Downspouts (if any) and Other Surface Mounted Items: Insert sleeves of 1/4" brass or galvanized tubing to pass anchor screws for attachment of downspouts and other mounted items and light fixtures. I. Smoothing: Assure that the overall exposed surfaces are flat, with all edges aligned. Use straightedge at least 10 feet long to check offsets. Fill any dents greater than 1/8" across, using manufacturer’s recommended repair methods. Let filler dry and then sand high areas to produce flat surface. 1. Sanding Parallel to Joints: Not allowed. 2. Residue: Vacuum away all sanding residue. 3. Low Spots: Filling with base coat material or other compound NOT allowed.

3.05. INSTALLATION OF BASE COAT AND REINFORCING MESHES A. Preparation: Before applying base coat: 1. Surface Defects: Sand off any damaged areas, such as insulation degraded by UV exposure. Feather the edges of sanded areas. 2. Priming: Prime the insulation board surface when so required by system manufacturer. B. Initial Base Coat: Apply base coat material with a flat stainless steel trowel all across the insulation to a uniform coat approximately 1/16" thick, tightly bonded to the insulation and free of voids and thin spots. C. Mesh: Apply mesh in continuous lengths over base coat while still fresh, to create a smooth, uniform base not greater than 3/32" thick. 1. Embedding: Using a stainless steel trowel, embed mesh in the fresh base coat material, ensuring that mesh is free of wrinkles and no mesh color is visible. Use additional base coat material as required. 2. Joints: Overlap edges of mesh at least 2-1/2". Do not lap joints within 8" of a corner or within 4" of a horizontal insulation joint. 3. Joint Laps: Feather out embedding material to at least 8" each side of the overlap. 4. Corners: Ensure complete coverage of mesh at corners of insulation. 5. Smoothness: Repair any areas that are not flat. D. Strip Mesh: Apply strip mesh all along decorative joint lines, all along outside and inside corners.

3.06. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Extent: Apply sealants to joints between panels within the field of the system and around perimeters, to create a weathertight, leakproof construction. B. Surface Conditions: Apply the sealants only to cured base coat material before the application of finish coats. Apply sealants only to base coatings that COMPLETELY encapsulate the insulation board as well as the reinforcing mesh. C. Joint Sizes: Apply sealants only to joints of the required sizes. 1. Where EIFS abuts other materials, minimum width of expansion joint shall be 1/2”. 2. Expansion joints between sections of EIFS shall have a minimum width of 3/4”. D. Backing: Do not allow sealant to adhere to bottom or back of joint; use backer rod and bond breaker tape accordingly. E. Workmanship: Conform to standards of Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

072400-6 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.07. INSTALLATION OF FINISH A. Inspection and Preparation: After base coat material is dry to manufacturer’s specifications, inspect surface for flatness, protruding fibers, damage and deterioration due to weathering. Repair as required to create even surfaces. B. Prime Coat: Prime for the base coat surface as required by system manufacturer, using primer colored to match finish coat. C. Sealed Joints: Where sealants are to be applied, mask off the portions of base coat that are to be bonded to the sealants. Do not apply finish over joint faces to be caulked. D. Finish Coat Application: Apply tight to base coat with a clean stainless steel trowel, always working to a wet edge, using sufficient workers and equipment to prevent cold joints, scaffolding lines, etc. Terminate finish coat application only at a joint. E. Finish Coat Texture: Texture the finish throughout the applications to match the approved sample.

3.08. PROTECTION OF FINISH A. Protect finish coat from the weather until fully cured. Protect from rain and excessive sun with plastic sheeting. B. Anchor the protective sheeting in manner to avoid damage to completed work. Any damage to completed work shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to Owner.

3.09. CLEANUP A. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces of spatter stemming from these operations. B. Remove left over materials and equipment from the site.

END 072400.

OEMA-2019-145 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 075419 - PVC ROOFING SYSTEM

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Fully adhered, single ply sheet roofing system. 2. Cover board (where required to meet performance specified). 3. Mechanically fastened board and tapered roof insulation. 4. Elastomeric membrane roof flashings, including base flashings and parapet flashings. 5. Elastomeric flashing boots at pipe penetrations. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Plywood roof sheathing & treated wood nailers and blocking...... Section 061000. 2. Sheet metal coping, roof edges and related flashings...... Section 076200. 3. Sealants for general construction...... Section 079200. 4. Prefabricated curbs for rooftop mechanical equipment...... Div. 23 Sections.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Roofing Contractor's Qualifications: 1. The Duro-Last Roofing System must be installed by an authorized Duro-Last contractor capable of providing the specified warranty for the new roofing. 2. Licensed in the state in which the Project resides (if applicable), specializing for at least 5 years in the kind of membrane system involved, who is certified/licensed by roofing membrane system producer and who can furnish for this installation a fulltime foreman, factory trained by the roof membrane system producer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all roofing system components (including, but not limited to, membrane, roof insulation, fasteners, adhesives, flexible flashings and boots, metal copings and roof edges, and items as required to obtain full system warranty) from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. C. Pre-Construction Conference: Roofing Installer shall meet with Owner’s representative and roof membrane producer’s representative before construction begins to establish the techniques and methods required to complete the roofing work as well as the criteria to be used during inspections. D. Scheduling and Coordination: 1. Coordinate roofing installation with mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. 2. No phased construction will be considered or approved. E. Manufacturer’s Inspection: Membrane manufacturer’s representative shall inspect roofing during its installation; and, upon completion, he shall do final inspection in company with Owner’s authorized representative. Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections. 1. As a minimum, membrane producer shall inspect: a. Acceptability of deck / substrate. b. Installation of insulation. c. Adhering of membrane. d. Construction of seams and base flashings. e. Other critical points of construction as deemed necessary at the pre-construction conference.

OEMA-2019-145 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Copies of record photographs / inspection reports shall be made available to Owner upon request. F. No wet or damaged materials shall be installed.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit roofing materials producer’s specifications, material characteristics and installation instructions for each product required, including fasteners. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate: 1. Outline of roof and dimensions. 2. Typical and special details for flashings, roof curbs, penetrations, roof drains, perimeter conditions, termination details, etc. Reference the locations of details on roof outline. 3. Number and mark of each factory prepared roofing sheet and flashing. 4. Fastener patterns for insulation at field, perimeter and corner conditions, as well as membrane edges, as required to meet design requirements for wind uplift resistance. 5. Layout of tapered insulation, indicated finished slopes. 6. Locations of walkway pads. 7. Locations of “apron” (second layer of roofing membrane) at indicated exhaust fans. D. Manufacturer’s Certificates: 1. Submit copy of membrane producer’s approval of Installer. 2. Submit membrane producer’s letter, signed by an officer of the company, affirming that all construction documents have been reviewed, the materials proposed for use comply with the requirements of the construction documents and are acceptable to the company for issue of the warranties specified. 3. Submit certification that the roof system installed conforms to the wind uplift resistance design pressures indicated on Drawings and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek as Class A according to external fire tests conducted per ASTM E 108. 4. Submit list of foremen who have received factory training for installation of the system to be installed, along with kinds and dates of training. E. Test Strip Results: 1. Submit on a copy of the Shop Drawing plans marked to show where each test strip was cut to verify the integrity of welded seams. 2. Upon Owner’s request, submit the test strips taken, each identified for location and date taken. F. Pre-Job Inspection Testing: Where testing is required by membrane manufacturer (such as fastener pull out tests, etc.), submit copy of test results including plans indicating testing locations. G. Warranties: 1. Submit roofing system manufacturer’s sample warranty, with required supplement, for review. 2. Submit roofing system manufacturer’s executed warranty, made out to Owner, including required supplement. H. Maintenance Data: Submit roofing system manufacturer’s maintenance recommendations and requirements to include in maintenance manuals. Include all maintenance, inspection, and similar requirements required to keep roofing warranty in force.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All membrane assembly components shall bear FMRC-Approved marking. B. Deliver materials to job site in their original containers or packages, sealed, with legible labels intact, brand name, lot number, warning labels and reference standards clearly shown.

075419-2 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Store materials in the dry and in accordance with membrane producer’s instructions. Other than roof membrane, all materials furnished shall be stored between 60°F and 80°F or within temperature range as required by product manufacturer. Protect liquid materials and insulation from direct sunlight. D. No wet or damaged materials shall be used in the application. E. Any warped or broken insulation boards shall be removed from the site.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Winds: Do not weld membrane when gusty winds or broken skies cause rapid fluctuations in ambient heat gain and heat loss. 2. Cold Weather: Follow membrane producer’s special recommendations when cold weather retards free flow of adhesives and sealants. Do not apply adhesives below adhesive manufacturers’ recommended ambient temperature ranges. B. Electrical Power: Furnish power for heat welders by way of portable generator(s) producing at least 30 amps per welder supplied or at Contractor’s option, furnish power to 220V heat welders by way of #10 x 3 or greater power cords and boost the power with a step-up transformer when cord length exceeds 150 feet. C. Fire Prevention: Take every precaution to prevent fire. 1. Maintain at least 2 portable fire extinguishers, rated 10-B:C-20 pounds, near area where adhesives are being used and train applicators in their proper use. 2. Do not use open flames to heat adhesives. Allow solvents to air-dry. 3. Use only grounded spray equipment.

1.06. WARRANTIES A. Roofing system shall be provided with a non-prorated, No-Dollar-Limit, entire system warranty to the Owner, against leaks or defects of any kind due to faulty materials or workmanship, in which the manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail within the warranty period indicated. 1. Entire System Warranty shall include roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roof walkways, roof edge metals and other components of roofing system. 2. Provide wind speed warranty with coverage for minimum wind speed up to an including 72 miles per hour. 3. As a supplement to the roofing manufacturer’s warranty and attached to the warranty for the roofing for this project, the roofing manufacturer shall provide to the Owner, a letter on company letterhead, signed by an officer of the company, stating that the use of vegetable oils for cooking and/or frying will not void, limit or lessen the manufacturer’s warranty in any way. 4. Provide warranties of the following duration beginning at the date of Substantial Completion: a. Roofing membrane system producer’s 15-year warranty for materials and workmanship. b. Roofing Contractor’s 5-year warranty for workmanship. B. Membrane system manufacturer shall issue to the Owner the specified warranties upon its receipt of certification from installer that the entire roofing system was installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

OEMA-2019-145 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system, including roof edge metals, to resist the design wind uplift pressures, for each zone as indicated on Drawings, when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897: D. Energy Performance: Roofing membrane shall meet a minimum of one of the following requirements: 1. Three Year Aged Solar Reflectance: Not less than 0.55 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1549, ASTM E903 or ASTM E1918 or CRRC-1 Standard. 2. Three Year Aged Thermal Emittance (Emissivity): Not less than 0.75 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1371 or ASTM E408 or CRRC-1 Standard. 3. Three Year Aged Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 64. Solar reflectance index (SRI) shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E1980 using a convection coefficient of 2.1 Btu/h ft2·°F. Calculation of aged SRI shall be based on aged tested values of solar reflectance and thermal emittance. E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.02 MATERIALS A. General: All roofing system components shall be provided by or approved by membrane manufacturer for use in roofing system and meeting the requirements of manufacturer for specified warranty. B. Membrane Type and Manufacturer: Fully adhered scrim reinforced, polyvinyl chloride polymer blend (PVC) membrane, ASTM D4434 classified as Type III membrane, with a weft inserted polyester scrim, not less than .060" thick, Duro-Last (DL60) as manufactured by Duro-Last, Inc. Colors shall be as follows or as otherwise noted on drawings: 1. Vertical surfaces and potentially visible surfaces such as entrance and drive-thru canopies: Tan. 2. Main Roof: White. C. Base and Parapet Flashing: Same material as used for roof membrane. D. Pipe Flashings: Premolded boots of synthetic material approved by system producer for the membrane system, complete with stainless steel, screw tightened, pipe clamps. E. Walkway Pads: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

075419-4 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO F. Roof Insulation – General: 1. When Cover Board is Required: Provide roof insulation type A for all insulation layers between the cover board and deck. 2. When Cover Board is Not Required: Provide roof insulation type B for the top layer of insulation and provide roof insulation type A for balance of required insulation thickness. G. Roof Insulation Type A: Rigid boards (tapered where required) with polyisocyanurate core and glass fiber reinforced mat facers or organic/inorganic facers both sides; minimum aged R of 5.7 per 1" of thickness. Comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi (Grade 2) when tested according to ASTM D1621. 3. Use manufacturer’s product, acceptable to membrane manufacturer for warranty specified, which has a Class A rating. 4. Thickness: 1–1/2" to 2-1/2" for flat boards. No board shall be less than 1" thick. 5. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered polyisocyanurate insulation boards, minimum 1 inch thickness, fabricated to create a minimum installed slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless a steeper slope is indicated. 6. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where needed to create positive slope to drain. H. Roof Insulation Type B: Rigid boards with polyisocyanurate core and coated glass facer designed for use with fully adhered roofing membrane; minimum aged R of 5.7 per 1" of thickness. Comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi (Grade 2) when tested according to ASTM D1621. 1. Use manufacturer’s product, acceptable to membrane manufacturer for warranty specified, which has a Class A rating. 2. Thickness: Provide insulation board in 1" thickness. I. Mechanical Anchors: Anti-backout types recommended by roof system manufacturer, including stress distribution plates, for indicated substrate. Anchors shall feature anti-corrosive materials. 1. Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc-free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements. 2. Lengths: Selected to penetrate wood at least 1". 3. For Termination Bars: Furnish fasteners with neoprene washers. J. Cover Board (where required to meet performance specified): ASTM C 1177, glass-mat, water- resistant gypsum board, minimum 1/4 inch thick. Subject to compliance with requirements and acceptability of membrane manufacturer, provide the following: 1. Duro-Guard DensDeck Prime Roof Board. K. Auxiliary Materials: Prefabricated flashing units, bonding adhesives, sealants, splicing cements, mastics and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by producer of roof membrane for the system installed. L. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet. M. Flashing to Cover Corners in Substrates: Roof membrane manufacturer’s reinforced plastic sheet flashing strips, .035" (35 mil) minimum thickness. A. Grease Aprons: At kitchen exhaust hoods, adhere a second layer of roof membrane to first layer of roofing, a minimum of 4 ft out from perimeter of the exhaust hood curb. Extend grease apron further if recommended or required by roofing membrane manufacturer. B. Termination Bar:

OEMA-2019-145 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. One piece, surface mounted, .125" thick, mill finished, extruded 6063-T6 alloy aluminum, with angled lip on top creating a sealant ledge, equal to IB Aluminum Lip Termination Bar by IB Roof Systems, or approved equal. Unit shall be FM approved. Furnish aluminum in lengths not more than 4 feet long. 2. All exposed fasteners shall be installed with neoprene washers.

3. EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces to receive roofing system are suitable for application of the materials and that wood nailers have been properly installed. Notify General Contractor in writing of any unsuitable surfaces. B. Perform all testing required by membrane manufacturer (such as fastener pull out tests, etc.) and submit test results, including test location plans, to Owner. C. Proceeding with roof system application shall designate acceptance of conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces upon which roofing system is to be applied so that they will be clean, dry, and free of fins, sharp edges, loose, damaged and foreign materials, oil and grease. B. All surface voids in deck greater than 1/4" wide shall be filled flush with membrane producer’s recommended pourable sealer. C. Inspect underside of roof deck for conduits and pipes that might intersect new roofing fasteners. Clearly identify on topside of roof where such intersections might occur. D. Clean and maintain roof drains during roofing installation to prevent back-up of water. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION

E. Install roofing system, including all components and accessories, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. F. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 1. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General: Lay insulation boards over entire surface to receive membrane roofing, with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 50% between rows and at least 6” between layers. No joint shall exceed 1/4 inch in width. Do not allow difference in elevation between units at joints to exceed 1/16". 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 2. Fill gaps between insulation boards, or between insulation and dissimilar materials, that exceed 1/4 inch in width, with insulation. 3. Provide tapered insulation of slope necessary to create minimum finish roof slopes as indicated on Drawings. Final slopes less than 1/4" per foot in the field of the roof, before and after maximum loading, shall not be accepted. 4. Even if not shown on Drawings, provide crickets or saddles that are needed to maintain a positive water flow to drains, with minimum finish roof slope indicated on Drawings but not

075419-6 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO less than 1/4” per foot, before or after roof deflection under full design load. Install additional tapered insulation as necessary to assure the required flow. Take special care to correct flow patterns at rooftop equipment. 5. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. 6. Drive the screws perpendicular to the structural deck (not to the face of the insulation). 7. No more insulation shall be placed than can be covered with roofing membrane before the end of the day’s work or before the onset of inclement weather. B. Mechanically fasten the insulation using FMRC-approved spacing, usually a minimum of 1 approved fastener for every 4 square feet of roof insulation board.

3.05 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset cover board joints of from joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted. 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. B. Mechanically fasten the insulation and cover boards where cover boards using FMRC-approved spacing, usually a minimum of 1 approved fastener for every 4 square feet of roof insulation board.

3.06 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install roofing membrane and flashings, with adhesive, sealants, splicing cements, mastics, fasteners and other accessory materials as recommended by producer of roof membrane, in accordance with details, specifications and best practices recommended by membrane producer. 2. Follow all recommendations and comply with all precautions specified by roofing producer except that where conflict occurs between producer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more stringent requirement shall prevail. 3. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 4. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s Peel Stop Installation requirements as required by manufacturer. 5. Application techniques may vary as long as the requirements described within this specification are met: a. Position the prefabricated roof section over the area to be covered without stretching. Allow membrane to relax a minimum of 30 minutes prior to bonding. b. Fold the roof section back onto itself to expose half of the roof area to be covered by that section. c. Apply adhesive in front of the fold along its length. Be careful not to apply more of the adhesive than can be covered prior to the adhesive setting up. Start with moderate amounts of adhesive and adjust the amount as you get a feel for how fast the adhesive is setting up. d. Lift the top layer of membrane and, starting at the fold, use a stiff squeegee or broom to push the membrane into the adhesive. Care must be used to avoid wrinkles and air

OEMA-2019-145 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO pockets. Apply the membrane to cover the adhesive that has been applied and then repeat steps “c” and “d” until the first half of the roof section is completed. e. Repeat steps “c” and “d” for the second half of the roof section. f. As each new roof section is added, overlap the adjacent sheets a minimum of 3 to 6 inches. g. Do not contaminate the membrane where seams are to be welded together. h. Do not thin adhesives. 6. Hot Air Welding: a. Calibration: Do not begin welding with robot welders until tests on membrane scraps have established the correct temperature, welder weight and speed of application necessary for consistent, strong and continuous welds. b. Position the membrane to allow an overlap of the top membrane onto the bottom membrane, a minimum of 4 inches. Ensure the welding area is clean and free of foreign debris. c. Weld the top membrane to the bottom membrane using a hand-held welder or an automatic welding machine and silicone roller. A minimum 1½ inch wide continuous weld is required. d. All field weld seams should be inspected with a tack claw and all deficiencies repaired. e. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet after field welded seams are tested and approved. 7. Edge Attachment: In addition to adhesive application, mechanically attach edges of membrane all around roof edges and roof openings, and at terminations, using screws and bonding plates and/or termination strips according to membrane producer’s recommendations and approved details. a. Provide a continuous bead of sealant under edge of roofing membrane that terminates under metal roof edge. 8. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.07 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Flashing: 1. The previous sections, which outlined acceptable products and proper substrate preparation, also apply to the walls. 2. The membrane is to be adhered as follows: a. Walls: 1) Adhesive must be applied to both the wall/substrate and to the membrane. The minimum coverage is 90 square feet per gallon between both surfaces. The actual coverage may vary depending upon the type of substrate and atmospheric conditions. 2) Do not adhere the same sheet of membrane that is covering the roof deck to a wall. Instead, use a separate sheet, with fastening tabs and mechanically fasten through one of the sheets at the roof-to-wall transition. 3) Provide mechanical fasteners and attachment spacing as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 4) A row of mechanical fasteners (with termination bar) is required at all transitions on the wall except at the top if the membrane will extend to the outside face of the wall. These rows of fasteners can be installed through fastening tabs on prefabricated sheets.

075419-8 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 5) Fasten termination bars a maximum of 12" o.c. and within 2" of ends of units, using neoprene washers with fasteners appropriate to substrate. Allow expansion space between units of 3/16" when metal temperature is 70°F or below and 1/8" when above 70°F. Provide sealant at top sealant ledge of termination bar. b. Roof Penetrations: 1) Mechanical fastening is required at all roof penetrations. These include, but are not limited to, pipes, drains, curbs and expansion joints. 2) Refer to manufacturer’s detail drawings for proper termination at roof penetrations. c. Walkway Pads: Install membrane manufacturer’s recommended walkway pad in locations shown and in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and detail drawings. B. Counterflashings, metal edges, and other perimeter or penetration sheet metal work shall be properly fastened and sealed to maintain a watertight condition. C. Temporary Closures: Install as needed to prevent water from flowing beneath the roof system during breaks in installation such as due to inclement weather. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for materials and methods.

3.08 GREASE “APRON” INSTALLATION A. Grease aprons shall be installed around the kitchen exhaust hoods indicated on Drawings to protect roofing membrane. Grease aprons shall extend from the exhaust fan curb to a point at least four feet out from base of curb, on all sides. B. Prior to installation of apron, clean roof membrane according to membrane manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not use cleaning products that will adversely affect the adhesion of the apron membrane. C. Immediately after cleaned membrane has completely dried, fully adhere grease apron to roof membrane surface with 100% adhesive coverage. Apply lap sealant to all cut edges of sheet. Lap sealant shall cover and seal all edges that expose membrane’s reinforcing scrim.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL D. Maintain roof membrane system manufacturer’s workmanship quality control program throughout the installation. E. Seam Testing: 1. Seams: Probe ALL lap edges with approved tool and repair all edges which accept the probe; AND cut out and test no less than 1 cross strip of seam immediately after each startup of heat welder, including startups after break times, and major changes in weather. Take additional cuts at irregular areas, T-joints and hand-welded areas. 2. Records of Tests: Save the test strips and label each one with date and time of test. Indicate on a copy of Shop Drawing plans where each test strip was cut, and submit a copy of test locations to Architect. F. Final Roof Inspection: 1. Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion to verify compliance with performance and warranty requirements. G. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

OEMA-2019-145 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-9 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. D. Remove roof construction rubble, debris, and excess roofing materials and containers.

END 075419.

075419-10 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL WORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features:

1. Metal coping and roof edges. 2. Metal canopy fascia. 3. Metal soffits. 4. Overflow scupper. 5. Gutter and downspout. 6. Miscellaneous break metal shapes as detailed. 7. Metal flashings and counterflashings as detailed. 8. Sealants required to make systems leakproof. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Wood framing, nailers, curbs and blocking...... Section 061000. 2. PVC roofing system...... Section 075419. 3. Sealants for general construction...... Section 079200.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References: References shall refer to the most recent edition of each standard. 1. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems. 2. SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry Standards. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. FM Global (FM): Perimeter Flashing, FM Data Sheet 1-49. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA). B. Details Not Shown On Construction Documents: Shall comply with applicable recommendations and details of the manufacturer, “Construction Details” by NRCA and “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by SMACNA. C. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall material, joints and seams to provide leakproof, secure and non-corrosive installation. D. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain metal copings, roof edges and canopy fascias approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system warranty specified in Section 075419 “PVC Roofing System.” 2. Provide prefinished break metal from manufacturer of metal copings, roof edges and canopy fascias to ensure finishes match.

1.03. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals per provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

OEMA-2019-145 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for each pre-manufactured item. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Samples: Submit 2 complete sets of each proposed color and finish, using the specified finish on the same metal as will be used for the sheet metal work. Final approval of color and finish will be made by Culver's corporate offices. D. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Shop Drawings specific to the project. Scales shall be sufficiently large to show all components clearly. 1. Show details of flashings, roof curbs, copings, roof edges, fascia, gutters, downspouts, sealants, gauges, finishes and interfaces with surrounding materials. 2. Clearly detail profile, joining, length of sections, fastening installation details, location of accessory items, flashing details and dimensions. Distinguish between plant- and field- assembled work. 3. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction. 4. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. E. Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with performance requirements herein. F. Submit manufacturer’s written guarantee at completion of work.

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers with all markings intact. B. Do not store sheet metal work in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal work away from uncured concrete and masonry. Protect from water and extreme humidity. C. Protect strippable protective covering on prefinished sheet metal work from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of sheet metal work installation. D. Store cements, adhesives and sealants in the manner and temperature range recommended by the individual Manufacturers.

1.06. WARRANTY A. Roofing System Warranty: Sheet metal work immediately adjacent to roofing membrane shall be included in the roofing system warranty in Section 075419 “PVC Roofing System.” B. Non-Pro-Rated Warranty on Fluoropolymer Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace pre-finished sheet metal work that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 35 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal work shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,

076200-2 SHEET METAL WORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal work shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Sheet Metal Work: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Design Standards: Manufacture and install metal copings and roof-edges tested according to SPRI ES-1 and FM Approvals Class 1-225. Sheet Metal Work shall be capable of resisting the design pressures indicated on the Drawings. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02. MATERIALS / PRODUCTS

A. Roof Copings: “Flat Coping” by Exceptional Metals.

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus) Base / Cleat: Provide 22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume) Cover: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy- coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process.

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.

B. Roof Edges: “2-Piece Snap-On Compression” by Exceptional Metals.

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus) Base / Cleat: Provide 22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume) Cover: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy- coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process.

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.

C. Canopy Roof Edges: “2-Piece Snap-On Compression” by Exceptional Metals.

1. Base / Cleat: Provide one of the following materials as recommended by roof edge manufacturer to be compatible with cover. a. 22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (Galvalume Plus) according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet. b. Aluminum extrusion complying with ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

OEMA-2019-145 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Aluminum Cover: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with embossed surface. a. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. b. Sheet Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch thick.

D. Drip Edge (at canopy with gutters): “T-Edge” as manufactured by Exceptional Metals.

1. Cleat (where required by manufacturer): Provide one of the following materials as recommended by roof edge manufacturer to be compatible with cover. a. 22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (Galvalume Plus) according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet. b. Aluminum extrusion complying with ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

2. Aluminum Drip Edge and Splice Plates: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with embossed surface. a. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. b. Sheet Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch thick.

E. Canopy Scuppers: “2-Piece Snap-On Spill-Out Scupper” by Exceptional Metals.

1. Constructed of 18” long vinyl coated base, two outside membrane corners, and a 24” metal cover and a spill out skirt. Metal cover shall match material, gauge, profile and finish of Canopy Roof Edge.

F. Canopy Break Metal: 0.040 aluminum sheet of material, gauge and finish to match canopy roof edge.

G. Main Roof Scuppers and Factory Painted Break Metal: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy- coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process.

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.

H. Roof Copings, Roof Edges - General:

1. Length: 10 ft lengths.

2. Accessories: Held in place by continuous cleats nailed to wood blocking. Joints shall be backed with concealed splice plates at least 8" wide, fabricated with end dams and having gaskets to prevent water migrating from the joint area. Corners shall be mitered and seamed. Support the center of coping lengths to resist mechanical damage.

I. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface, 2B (bright, cold rolled) finish, 26 gauge.

J. Soffit: Factory formed aluminum panels, 12" wide with “V” jointed, tongue and groove connections and required trim. Panels shall be vented. Finish shall be a factory applied baked enamel in

076200-4 SHEET METAL WORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO manufacturer’s standard color selected by Architect. Panels shall be “System 3” Panels as manufactured by Rollex Corporation or approved equal.

K. Gutters: Provide size and profile indicated on Drawings. Make all joints water-tight.

1. At Dumpster Shed: Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 361 or ASTM A 446, with G90 zinc coating, auto corrective leveled, with manufacturer’s standard embossed texture. a. Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings. b. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.022 inch thick (26 gauge) galvanized steel pre-finished to match roof edge. c. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.028 inch thick (24 gauge) galvanized steel pre-finished to match roof edge.

2. Length: Fabricate in minimum 8 foot long sections

3. Accessories: Provide end pieces, outlet tubes, hanger straps and other accessories as required. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers and gutter accessories from same metal and with same finish as gutters. Provide prefinished inside and outside corners. Size outlet tube to fit downspout provided.

4. Hanger Straps: Provide minimum 1 inch wide, double thickness flat-stock straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, with thickness not less 14 gauge. Use hangers of adequate in size and spacing to support gutters filled with ice. Finish shall be the same type, thickness and color as gutters. Locate straps at a maximum of 30 inches on center.

L. Downspouts:

1. At Dumpster Shed: 26-gauge factory finished galvanized steel, having plain surface and rectangular profile, nominal 4” x 5” size, with closed face. Provide approx. 45° exit elbow. Downspouts shall be factory finished to match gutters.

2. Hanger Straps: Provide hanger straps to anchor downspout to wall at maximum 4’-0” intervals. Hanger straps shall be of flat-stock, fabricated from same metal as downspouts, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than 14 gauge. Cut edges shall be hemmed. Finish shall be the same type, thickness and color as downspouts. M. Fasteners: Ring-shank or screw-shank hot-dip galvanized nails or carbon steel screws coated with anti-corrosion coating, sized as required to meet UL 580 Class 60 strength requirements. 1. For Fastening Aluminum: Aluminum or stainless steel nails with annular threads, of sufficient length to penetrate wood blocking at least 7/8". 2. Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements.

2.03. ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish fasteners, brackets, anchoring devices, spacers, flashings, closures, adhesives, joint sealers, expansion joints and other components needed for a complete, permanently weatherproof installation. Use materials that are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating, and compatible with panel faces. B. Sheet Metal Work Sealants: 1. Tapes: Butyl based, not less than 3/4" wide where penetrated by screws.

OEMA-2019-145 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Elastomeric Sealants: ASTM C920 elastomeric, high modulus, non-corrosive sealants bearing sealant manufacturer’s 20-year guarantee. Provide sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 3. Foam-In-Place Sealants: NOT allowed except to form back-up for liquid sealants and to fill voids at roof penetrations to inhibit thermal leakage. 4. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

2.04. FABRICATION A. Metal copings, roof edges and canopy roof edges shall be factory fabricated and finished. B. Canopy break metal shall be fabricated from either pre-finished coiled stock in the factory or in the field or from sheet stock formed and finished in the factory. C. Form and fabricate fascia and trim to the profiles shown and as required for permanent leakproof construction. 1. Shop-fabricate the materials to the greatest extent possible.

2. Fabricate sheet metal work in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 3. Provide concealed, noiseless means to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction, located so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. 4. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. 5. Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form an open (non-compressed) hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. 6. Except as approved otherwise, fabricate joints so that fasteners will be concealed from the weather. Fabricate items so that fasteners pass only through predrilled holes. a. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. 7. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. 8. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. a. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 9. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. 10. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION A. The installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which sheet metal work will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

076200-6 SHEET METAL WORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Coordinate sheet metal work with adjoining work to provide a permanently leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation. C. Remove any strippable plastic protection before beginning installation.

3.02. SHEET METAL INSTALLATION

A. Install pre-manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer written installation instructions. B. Comply with and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation. C. Anchor sheet metal work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal systems. D. Attachment to solid sheathing/nailers with concealed appropriate fasteners. Fasteners shall penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance required to meet performance requirements. E. Install sheet metal work in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb without oil-canning, warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

3.03. ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. Do not locate joints above building entry doors. 1. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart to roof deck, unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 2. Provide elbows and extensions at base of downspout to direct water away from building.

3.04. DAMAGED MATERIALS A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. B. Repair or replace any sheet metal work that has been damaged as directed by Architect. C. Minor damage to finish may be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect.

END 076200.

OEMA-2019-145 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Sealant work for all exterior and interior joints, except as required to be completed under other Sections of the Specifications. 2. Standards for the sealant work specified in other Sections of the Specifications. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Sealants in concrete insolation joints...... Section 033000. 2. Exterior Insulation & Finish System (EIFS) ...... Section 072400. 3. Sealant at roof membrane assembly edges ...... Section 075419. 4. Sealant within joints of sheet metal work...... Section 076200. 5. Sealing aluminum entrance system ...... Section 084113. 6. Glazing sealants...... Section 088000. 7. Acoustical sealants ...... Section 092116. 8. Ceramic Tile ...... Section 093013. 9. Resinous Flooring...... Section 096724. 10. Caulking touchup by painters ...... Section 099000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility: Before purchasing any sealant specified, investigate its compatibility with the joint surfaces and other materials in the joint system. Provide only materials that are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation condition, as affirmed by manufacturer’s published data or certification. B. Deliver materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original label attached, one brand for each type of sealant. C. Applicators: Sealants shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by skilled applicators trained in accordance with the Sealant, Water-proofing, and Restoration Institute’s (SWRI) “Applicator Training Manual.” Submit certificates of SWRI approved training for applicators, upon request. D. Scheduling: Apply sealants before paints are applied.

1.03. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit 4 copies of manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant and associated miscellaneous material required.

OEMA-2019-145 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Sealant for General Use and for Thresholds: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A, O. Silicone base, single component, neutral curing; Shore A hardness between 15 and 50; non-staining; non-bleeding. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Pecora; “890FTS” 2. G.E. (Momentive); “SCS9000 Silpruf NB” 3. Dow Corning; “DOWSIL 756 SMS Building Sealant” B. Sealant for Joints in Floors: Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T, non-staining, non-bleeding. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Master Builders Solutions from BASF; MasterSeal SL 1. 2. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. 3. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952. 4. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL. 5. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45SSL. C. Sealants Around Food Preparation and Other Interior Wet Areas: Mildew-Resistant, Single- Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Dow Corning Corporation; DOWSIL 786 Silicone Sealant. 2. GE Advanced Materials; Silicones; SCS1700 Sanitary. 3. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. 4. Pecora; 898NST. D. Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s extended line of colors. E. Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of closed-cell polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, extruded polyolefin foam with non-absorptive skin, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide size of rod that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint and will minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. 2. Use adhesive backed 1/4" quarter round backer rod for all fillet joints, including fillet joints around exterior side of windows. F. Joint Cleaners: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be sealed. G. Joint Primer/Sealer: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces involved.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces prior to application for suitability to receive sealant work. B. Notify the General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to a satisfactory application that cannot be corrected by ordinary cleaning and priming.

3.02. PREPARATION A. Clean joint surfaces free of dirt, oil, grease, moisture, loose mortar and/or other foreign matter immediately before installation of sealant. B. Metal surfaces shall be wiped with joint cleaner using “two cloth” method and then dried.

079200-2 JOINT SEALANTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with a stiff bristle or fiber brush and blown or brushed clean. D. Test each proposed combination of sealant and substrate to determine whether or not a primer is required to achieve the sealant manufacturer's advertised bond strength. E. When applying primers or sealants that may bleed or stain, mask adjacent surfaces.

3.03. APPLICATION A. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Do not apply to damp surfaces. B. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. C. Install sealant backer rod except where shown to be omitted. Install backer rod with approved tool designed to achieve the following uniform depths of sealant (at the thinnest point), unless recommended otherwise by sealant manufacturer: 1. Sealant in joints 1/4" wide shall be approximately but not less than 1/8" thick. 2. Sealant in joints 3/8" to 1/2" wide shall be not less than 3/16" thick but no thicker than half the width of the joint. 3. Sealant in joints larger than 1/2" wide shall be not less than 1/4" thick but no thicker than half the width of the joint. D. Employ only proven application techniques which will ensure that sealant will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of the joint bonding surfaces, solid to the backing material. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. 2. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. E. All joints shall be tooled immediately after application and left free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Use dry tooling techniques unless sealant manufacturer recommends otherwise.

3.04. APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Provide sealant at both sides of all openings in exterior walls including but not limited to joints around perimeters of exterior window frames, aluminum entrance framing, door frames, louvers and other penetrations. B. Exterior thresholds shall receive two continuous beads of sealant, one near each of the interior and exterior edges of the threshold. C. Provide sealant at other joints including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Joints at base of hollow metal door frames. Sealant shall be installed prior to the installation of floor coverings. 2. Control joints in wall constructions. 3. Cross-joints in all copings, fascias and metal flashings when not sealed within the joint or provided with a sufficient overlap (min. 4" for an 8" face exposure). 4. Joints around penetrations through interior partitions and walls. 5. Joints where edges of gypsum board abut irregular surfaces. 6. Joints where countertops, cabinetwork, or other built-in work intersect irregular surfaces. 7. Control joints in quarry tile and paver tile floors. 8. Joints between ceramic wall tile and adjacent construction.

OEMA-2019-145 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 9. Inside wall corner joints with ceramic tile on both sides of corner. 10. Joint between resinous flooring cove cap and wall surface.

3.05. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Remove all excess material and smears adjacent to joints as work progresses. B. Protect finished sealant installation until cured. C. Cutout and remove contaminated sealants, and replace with fresh sealant.

END 079200.

079200-4 JOINT SEALANTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL WORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Flush steel door for exterior service door(s). 2. Non-rated hollow metal frames for steel door(s). 3. Silencers at doors not receiving weatherstripping. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 4. Grouting-in of hollow metal frames at masonry...... Section 042000. 5. Installing frame anchors into masonry ...... Section 042000. 6. Sealants at hollow metal frame...... Section 079200. 7. Furnishing and installation of door hardware, including thresholds ...... Section 087100. 8. Glazing ...... Section 088000. 9. Finish painting ...... Section 099000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide standard hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm and in compliance with the recommended specifications of the National Associations of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) and the Steel Door Institute (SDI), except as may be specified otherwise herein. B. Performance Standard: 1. Doors manufactured under this Section shall be capable of passing the following ANSI A250.4 tests when conducted on a specimen 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4": a. Swing Test: Level A (1,000,000 cycles). b. Twist Test: 1-1/4” at 300 lbs pressure. 2. Frames manufactured under this Section shall be capable of passing the following ANSI A250.4 tests when conducted on a specimen 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4": c. Swing Test: Level A (1,000,000 cycles). C. Supplier’s Qualifications: An established door distribution firm certified in writing by the hollow metal manufacturer as one of their approved suppliers, with at least 3 years’ successful experience in the supplying and installation of hollow metal work of the type specified. D. Thermal Performance Testing Standard: ASTM C 1363.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Frames: Include configurations, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware, sizes of reinforcements, shop finishes and finished sizes. 2. Door: Include elevations and locations of internal reinforcements, core construction, cut outs for glazing (if any), shop finishes and edge closure methods. D. Product Test Reports: Submit for thermal performance tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

OEMA-2019-145 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Submit manufacturer’s letter verifying that the subcontractor supplying the hollow metal work is a certified agent of the manufacturer. F. Submit manufacturer’s letter certifying galvanizing weights furnished. Include with the letter a description of the treatment given to galvanizing in preparation for painting.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job site storage. B. Deliver frame with temporarily attached steel angle shipping bar (“spreader bar”), or other means, to assure that frame arrives free of wracking and distortion. C. Upon arrival at site, open wrappings to permit ventilation and inspect door and frame for scratches and abrasions. Immediately touch up exposed metal with primer of the type applied at factory. D. Store doors and frames at the building site off floor, under cover. Place units on at least 4" high wood sills in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to requirements herein, hollow metal work shall be as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door, Assa Abloy 2. Curries Company, Assa Abloy 3. Philipp Manufacturing Company 4. Steelcraft, an Allegion Brand 5. Security Metal Products Corporation

2.02. MATERIALS A. Pre-Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated commercial quality carbon steel sheets, complying with ASTM A 653 CS, Type B, coating designation G60 or A60. B. Frame Anchors: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. D. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Rust-oleum #254864 Professional Undercoating Brush (for brush application). E. Silencers: Equal to Ives #SR64. F. Primer Paint: Capable of passing ANSI/SDI 250.10 test criteria after curing. G. Hardware Reinforcements: High grade galvanized steel plates.

2.03. DOOR A. Construction: ANSI A250.8, Level 3 (extra heavy duty), Model 2 (seamless), flush, 1-3/4" thick, fully insulated, free of warp. Hinge and lock edge seams shall be mechanically interlocked, welded and filled, and ground/finished smooth. 1. “Oil canning,” buckles and other imperfections not allowed. 2. Grind and dress exposed welds smooth. B. Face Sheets: 16-gauge pre-galvanized sheet steel. C. Core: Vertical steel stiffener with foam-in-place polyurethane insulation. 1. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (U-factor of .36) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

081113-2 HOLLOW METAL WORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Core Reinforcement: Continuous vertical steel shapes of not less than 22-gauge steel, filling space between face sheets, and spot welded to core/face sheets. 3. Basis of Design: “Trio-E” Ceco Door by Assa Abloy or comparable product of other approved manufacturer. D. Door Size: Fabricate with minimum clearances necessary for operation without binding: 1. 3/32" (3/16" max.) at jambs and head. 2. 1/8" (3/8" max.) at threshold. 3. 3/8" (1/2" max.) at location with no threshold. 4. Doors on continuous hinges will not require mortises for hinges; adjust face size(s) accordingly. E. Closure Channels: Minimum thickness 0.042 inch (18 gauge) steel. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel channels where door faces are galvanized. Plastic closures not allowed. 5. Top of Door: Fabricate with channel having downturned legs positioned between the door faces, flush with top edge of door faces. Continuously seal joints between channel and door faces to be watertight. 6. Bottoms of Door: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep holes in bottom channel. F. Openings (if door is noted to have vision panel): At vision openings provide 12-gauge channel frames inside the door assembly, welded to both faces. 1. Removable Glazing Stops: Rolled steel shapes formed from 20-gauge pre-galvanized steel, with tight butted corners; formed to finish flush or slightly raised from door face. Prepare for countersunk screws at minimum of 12" o.c. Install so glazing frame is not removable from the exterior of the door. SlimTrim glazing trim for 1 inch thick insulating glazing by Ceco Door or similar product by other approved manufacturers. 2. Furnish flathead zinc, zinc-dichromate or cadmium plated screws for attachment.

2.04. FRAMES A. Construction: Shop-welded, formed from 14-gauge pre-galvanized steel sheets. Faces, returns and rabbets at corners shall be continuously saw-mitered and welded. B. All exposed welds shall be continuous, filling the joint, and ground smooth. C. Grout Filled Frames: 1. Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames. 2. Frames shall be back coated with corrosion-resistant coating. D. Floor Anchors: Steel clip-angle of same width and gage as frame with legs welded to back of frame, or adjustable type. Provide 2 widely spaced 1/4" holes for anchorage to floor. E. Wall Anchors: 1. At Stud Walls: Welded on 18-gauge steel “Z” angle clips full width of frame, with tab pressed against back of each frame face. 2. At Masonry Walls: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 18 gauge thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2” X 10” long. F. Frame Anchor Placement: Provide 3 wall anchors and 1 floor anchor per jamb. Locate bottom wall anchor just above hinge height and upper wall anchors just below hinge heights. For doors exceeding 3’-8” in width add another wall anchor at the hinge jamb above the top hinge.

2.05. HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Reinforce for all required hardware with high-grade steel plate reinforcement according to the following schedule. Use galvanized plates at galvanized doors and frames.

OEMA-2019-145 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Butt hinges: 7-gauge (3/16") x 1-1/4" x 10" (9" on doors). 2. Continuous hinges: None. 3. Closer: 12-gauge. 4. Strike and lock faces: 12-gauge. 5. Lock body: 14-gauge. 6. In lieu of 7-gauge hinge reinforcement plates, a 12-gauge channel may be used, provided that manufacturer submits test results confirming screw retention capacity is not lessened. 7. Do not spot weld reinforcing plates for butts; fillet weld each side of plate. 8. Size closer reinforcement sufficiently large to receive all major sizes and brands of closers. 9. Provide mortar guards around hardware reinforcing in frames at masonry walls. B. Drill and tap to receive all items of mortise hardware at the fabricator’s plant, to the extent practicable, in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A115. Coordinate work with Hardware Supplier for templates, diameters and locations of screws. 1. Doors on continuous hinges shall not be mortised. C. Viewers: Install per manufacturer’s written instructions, provide air and moisture seal at face of door.

2.06. SHOP FINISH A. Doors and frames shall have bonderized, baked-on rust inhibitive prime coat. B. After fabrication, remove tool marks and surface imperfections. Dress welded joints smooth and leave cut edges clean, with arrises straight and sharply defined. C. Touch up all welds and scratches with a zinc dust-zinc oxide primer or zinc rich primer. Apply a phosphatizing pre-paint treatment (such as Bonderizing) to the thoroughly cleaned zinc and top with a coat of high grade, rust inhibitive primer.Primers shall be well cured before items are shipped. Touch up all runs, bare spots and smears. E. Cured primer, as a minimum, shall be capable of passing ANSI/SDI A 250.10 test criteria.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION OF DOOR AND FRAME A. Prior to installation, check and correct frame per NAAMM recommendations for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness that may affect proper installation. B. Replace shipping bars at bottom of welded frame with sturdy wood spreader set to assure proper width of opening. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Set frame accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, square and true in accordance with NAAMM Standard HMMA 840. D. Brace all welded frames in proper alignment until built-in. E. Install rubber silencers in all silencer holes of frames not scheduled to receive weatherstripping. F. Secure base anchors and wall anchors rigidly. Set expansion bolts using workmen experienced in such work. Re-drill improper holes and provide with larger expansion shields. G. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

081113-4 HOLLOW METAL WORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.02. DOOR INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s templates and instructions. B. Where door is scheduled to be glazed, fasten glazing stops loosely in place with required fasteners, leaving glazing rabbets ready for installation of glass by glazers.

3.03. TOUCH-UP AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of frame, sand any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat with a zinc- dust/zinc-oxide primer. Feather out edges. B. Immediately after installation of door, re-inspect prime coat on door and frame for scratches and rust. Cover bare metal with compatible air-drying primer, feathering out edges.

END 081113.

OEMA-2019-145 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS SECTION 081513 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Pre-hung plastic laminate faced door with aluminum frames. 2. Preparation of plastic laminate-faced doors for hardware. 3. Installation of pre-hung hardware. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Furnishing of door hardware and installation standards...... Section 087100. 2. Furnishing of coat hook for toilet room stall doors ...... See Drawings. 3. Installation of hardware other than pre-hung hardware...... Section 087100. 4. Glass and glazing...... Section 088000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section, doors shall conform to: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)-Architectural Woodwork Standards, current edition. 2. NEMA LD 3 – High Pressure Decorative Laminates 3. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) - WWDA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; current edition.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings coordinated with door frame and hardware requirements. 1. Indicate AWI construction type/grade and construction details, WDMA I.S.1-A performance grade, door core materials, and plastic laminate selection and grade. 2. Indicate door elevations and locations, materials, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, edge profiles and finishes, blocking for hardware, and cut outs for glazing. 3. Indicate door frame elevations and locations, materials, profiles, sizes, finishes, construction at joints, reinforcement for hardware, attachment system and fasteners. 4. Show accessories provided. Indicate hardware to be factory installed. D. Samples: 1. Verification Samples: Submit 3 veneer samples at least 8" x 10" showing range of patterns and color variations and sheen of finish. E. Certificates: Submit with the Shop Drawings a statement signed by an authorized representative of the door manufacturer certifying that the doors and finishes furnished will conform to the requirements of this Section.

OEMA-2019-145 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. Inspect doors and frames for damage upon delivery. Protect from moisture. B. Deliver doors and frames in weatherproof wrappings. C. Mark packaged doors with door tag numbers corresponding to approved Shop Drawings. D. Store doors in dry area, off of floor, with separators between doors to allow air circulation. Comply with manufacturers environmental limitations.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and HVAC system is operating. 2. Maintain the following temperature and humidity limits during storage, installation and until Substantial Completion: a. Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F. b. Humidity: 35 to 55 %.

1.06. WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s “life of the original installation” warranty providing correction of defective door(s), including veneer delamination, defective materials and finish, core telegraphing, and warping, cupping and bowing beyond specified installation tolerances, without charge to Owner by way of repair or replacement with materials meeting original specifications. B. Warranty shall bear manufacturer’s certification that the installation was inspected prior to issuance of warranty and that no provisions have been voided or nullified by way of installation or manufacture.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. Tel: (330) 343-6621. B. Substitutions: Comparable products of other manufacturer’s as approved by Architect.

2.02. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Non-Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Flush wood doors faced with 0.050 inch thick high pressure plastic laminate. 1. Type: Particleboard core type, complying with AWI Type PC-HPDL-5 and conforming to WDMA WWDA I.S.1-A; with average 30 pcf density core complying with ANSI A208.1 Grade LD-1. 2. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS (0.048 inch thick), high pressure plastic laminate, color and pattern as noted on the drawings. 3. Edge Banding: a. Full Size Doors: Laminate matching door face on vertical edges, top and bottom edges sealed. b. Toilet Stall Doors: Laminate matching door face on all edges. 4. Crossbands: 1/10 inch thick 3-ply wood crossbanding. 5. Total Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 6. Core Edges: Structural composite lumber.

081513-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 7. Stiles and Rails: Solid hardwood lumber. 8. Stile Width: 1-3/8 inches before trimming. 9. Top & Bottom Rail Heights: 1-3/8 inches before trimming. 10. Factory prefit and premachined for hardware that is not surface applied. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 11. Cutouts for lites made at factory; provide matching stops. 12. Face Plane Tolerance (Telegraphing): Variation in surface of face not more than 1/100 inch from true plane in any 3 inch span. 13. Warp Tolerance: Bow, cup, and twist not more than 1/4 inch in any 42 inches wide by 84 inches high area, or less. B. Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on drawings. C. Aluminum Door Frames: Marlite AAA (Aluminum Adjustable Architectural) consisting of all standard components, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 and with a clear satin anodized finish, frame series to fit wall condition. 1. Frame shall have continuous vinyl gasket on stop. 2. Corners shall have tight fitting mitered joints with concealed steel gusset connection. 3. Prepare frames for hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and on the Drawings. 4. Provide components as required for actual wall thicknesses at each door/frame condition, including wall finishes.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Securely anchor door frames straight, plumb and level without distortion and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Brace frames in position until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. Install doors in frames plumb and true, without rack, and so doors do not fall open or closed simply due to gravity. D. Install doors with all hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on drawings. For toilet room stall doors scheduled on Drawings, include installation of coat hook specified under toilet accessories. E. Installation Tolerance: Install doors with not more than 1/8 inch clearance at sides.

3.02. ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Adjust door and frame for free operation without binding, rack, or warp. B. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence. C. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely or are unable to stay at rest at any point in their swing. D. Protection of Completed Work: Protect installed doors and frames from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the Work. Replace doors and/or frames that have been damaged. Clean doors and frames just prior to acceptance of the Work.

END 081513.

OEMA-2019-145 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Aluminum framing for fixed aluminum windows. 2. Aluminum framing for entrance doors, sidelites, transoms and associated windows at entrance enclosures. 3. Aluminum entrance doors. 4. Service window unit with operating hardware. 5. Preparation for and installation of finish door hardware. 6. Perimeter sealant installation. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Standards for sealants, including installation ...... Section 079200. 2. Furnishing of and installation standards for hardware ...... Section 087100. 3. Glass and glazing...... Section 088000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal break components shall be manufactured to meet the following standards: 1. AAMA QAG 1, “Quality Assurance Processing & Monitoring Guide for Poured and Debridged Polyurethane Thermal Barriers.” 2. AAMA TIR A8, “Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing Systems.” 3. AAMA 505, “Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycling Test Procedure.” B. Sources of Supply: All aluminum storefront system components and aluminum doors provided under this Section shall be products of one manufacturer. C. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with Finish Hardware Supplier as required to assure proper fitting of hardware items furnished under Section 087100 “Finish Hardware”. a. Install hardware according to templates approved by hardware item manufacturers. b. Report to General Contractor in writing should templates not be delivered by Hardware Supplier in sufficient time to meet construction schedules. 2. Coordinate with Section 088000 “Glazing” to provide an assembly that meets System Energy Performance requirements specified herein and in Section 088000.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations and details, including gaskets, weatherstripping, methods of anchoring, type of alloy, finish, size and thickness of individual parts, dissimilar metal protection. C. System Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.

OEMA-2019-145 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO D. Anodizing Certificates: Anodized aluminum pieces shall be furnished with a letter of certification from the anodizer affirming that the items furnished have been finished according to the standard specified.

1.04. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.05. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Uncrate doors, frames, and related accessories, and store in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Remove all padding and packing in contact with aluminum immediately upon arrival in order to prevent staining.

1.06. WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer of aluminum storefront systems shall agree to repair or replace units whose components that do not comply with requirements or that fail due to inferior materials or workmanship within 10 years of installation. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Air infiltration through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components. B. Manufacturer of service window units shall agree to repair or replace units, including labor, whose components that do not comply with requirements or that fail due to inferior materials or workmanship within 1 year of installation. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, deflection exceeding 1/4 inch. b. Failure of welds. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Air infiltration through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. PRODUCT

2.01. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, registered in the state in which the Project resides, to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

084113-2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads and Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Framing and Fixed Glazing: a. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. b. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.26 percent of span. c. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. 2. Entrance Doors: a. Corner strength shall be tested per the manufacturers dual moment load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.2 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Entrance Doors: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. J. System Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance of framing system and glazing according to NFRC as follows:

OEMA-2019-145 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing assemblies shall have U-factor of not more than 0.38 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F. as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Entrance doors and framing assemblies shall have U-factor of not more than 0.77 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F. as determined according to NFRC 100. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing assemblies, and entrance door and framing assemblies, shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.36 as determined according to NFRC 200. K. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

2.02. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE WINDOW UNITS A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of window as calculated in accordance with applicable code. B. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, and migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network. C. Structural Design: Design glass and glazing in accordance with current Florida building code for most critical combination of wind, seismic, and dead loads. D. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.

2.03. MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE A. Framing for Fixed Windows and Framing for Entrance Doors, Sidelights and Transoms: Dual thermal-break type with nominal profile of 2” x 4-1/2”, center glazed. Furnish one of the below listed models: 1. “451UT” by Kawneer Company. 2. “Series 3000 XT” by Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 3. “Series 403 X” by EFCO Corporation. B. Service Window: Aluminum and stainless steel unit with clear 5/8" insulating glass, Model IFSC- 4040 by Quikserv Corp., Houston, Texas, tel. 800-388-8307. C. Framing for Fixed Windows: Same framing as at entries. D. Aluminum Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation, stile size as shown on Drawings.

1. Door Construction: a. At doors indicated to be thermally broken: 2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 1) Thermal construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. b. At all other doors: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

3. Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door.

084113-4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO E. Aluminum members, frames, glazing beads and mullions shall be extruded from ASTM B221, 6063 alloy of suitable temper, having a minimum tensile strength of 28,000 psi. 1. Major frame components shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.070 inch. 2. Aluminum glazing beads shall be snap-in type with a minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch and glazing legs no less than 3/4" high. 3. Sills/subsills shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.070 inch. F. Frame Thermal Breaks: Manufacturer’s standard type. Poured in place polyurethane thermal break material shall have a maximum tensile strength of 4,300 psi.

2.04. ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Aluminum or steel. Steel anchors must be primed with shop coat of approved zinc chromate primer and be insulated from the aluminum members. B. Fasteners: 1. Frame Assembly Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel. 2. Miscellaneous Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel with finish color to match frames where exposed to view. 3. For fastening anchors to building construction, use expansion bolts, toggle bolts or screws, as required by building construction material, not less than 1/4" diameter, made of cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164 and A 165. 4. Screws in masonry shall be equal to Rawl “Tappers.” No plastic expansion anchors allowed. C. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Alkali resistant, asbestos free bituminous paint conforming to ASTM D1187, plastic separators, insulating tapes or manufacturer’s standard. D. Glazing Seals: Extruded EPDM, vinyl, neoprene or silicone dry gasket seals with impervious skins standard to entrance manufacturer, solid gray color selected from supplier’s standard color options. Vinyl shall meet or exceed CS 230 standards. E. Weatherstripping: Thermoplastic elastomer weatherstrip system on all sides of exterior doors and/or frames, meeting AAMA 701/702 requirements. Provide surface applied bottom weatherstrip with flexible blade gasket at bottoms of doors. F. Sills/Subsills: Extruded aluminum sections shall assure that any water entering the glazing channels will be positively weeped to the exterior. Furnish sills with sub-structural components, such as legs and/or blocking, so as to assure complete support of the sill across the window opening. G. Sealants: Furnish type as required in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

2.05. FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble in as large sections in shop as consistent with shipping and field requirements. B. All joints shall form flush, hairline and weatherproof joints. C. All joints between sections and all field splices shall produce strength to resist misalignment and deformations due to imposed loads. D. Reinforce the mullions to support glass and framing to withstand a wind load of 25 psf without deflection exceeding 1/175 of any span. Provide snap-in stops for doors. Stops on any exterior side shall be lock-in tamperproof type. E. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing (if any). F. Doors shall have dual moment corner construction consisting of mechanical fastening using extruded aluminum channel clips and bolt fasteners and SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and fillet welds.

OEMA-2019-145 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO G. Where installation conditions do not allow interior vestibule doors to be raised at the time of installation so as to allow 3/4" clearance over floors, to clear floor mats, the doors shall be undercut as required to obtain the 3/4" clearance. H. Reinforce doors and frames for hardware with backing plates of non-magnetic steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 36. 1. Reinforce for closers with 10-gauge steel plate and 12-gauge plate for all other hardware. 2. Reinforce for all other cutouts and mortises similarly. I. Provide positive means to drain to the outside any water entering the system. Weep holes shall be baffled to prevent winds from preventing free drainage.

2.06. FINISH A. Aluminum members shall be furnished with Clear Anodic Finish in compliance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018mm or thicker.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to receive parts of the work specified herein. Verify all dimensions of in-place and subsequent construction. Examine wall flashings, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated installation. Installation of frames shall constitute acceptance of the existing conditions.

3.02. PREPARATION A. All surfaces that contact steel, concrete or stone masonry construction shall be prepared with dissimilar protection materials hereinbefore specified. Aluminum surfaces to remain exposed shall be protected from bituminous paint application.

3.03. INSTALLATION A. Set frames in locations shown, level, plumb and in line without distortion or impeding thermal movement. Place in proper relation to flashing and adjacent construction. Anchor securely as required to meet design loads indicated. Seal joints between framing members and mullions. Where moldings are joined, accurately cut and fit members to result in tightly closed joints. B. Do not use exposed fasteners except as approved by Owner. C. Cut, join and seal members to form positive paths of drainage within the framing in order to prevent any water that may enter the system from leaking through to the interior of the building. D. Hardware: Install hardware under requirements of Section 087100 “Finish Hardware.” E. Perimeter Sealant: Apply sealant to inside and outside joints of frame perimeters adjacent to other constructions, using materials and methods specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

3.04. ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors, exercising care to avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.

END 084113.

084113-6 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS SECTION 087100 - FINISH HARDWARE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames. Finish hardware required for pre-hanging of door in frames shall be installed under Section 081513 “Plastic Laminate Faced Doors” (complying with standards specified herein), all other hardware shall be installed under this section. 2. Furnishing and installation of finish hardware for exterior hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior and exterior aluminum doors in aluminum framing. Finish hardware shall be installed under Section 084113 “Aluminum Storefront Systems” according to the standards specified herein. 4. Furnishing and installation of other finish hardware not described herein or in other Sections of the Specifications but required for a complete and operable facility. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Hardware maintenance info for O&M manual...... Section 013300. 2. Sealant for exterior thresholds...... Section 079200. 3. Hollow metal doors, frames & silencers ...... Section 081113. 4. Plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames...... Section 081513. 5. Aluminum entrance doors, frames with integral weatherstripping ...... Section 084113.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier's Qualifications: A recognized builder's hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the area of the Project for not less than 5 years, and who has in his employ an experienced Hardware Consultant available at all reasonable times during the course of the work, for project hardware consultation to the Owner and Contractor. B. Workmen's Qualifications: Installation of hardware shall be assigned to experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions; either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the Project Site, at Contractor's option. C. Code Requirements: All finish hardware shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the applicable code authorities, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and the Accessibility Code for the state in which the project resides, irrespective of any other requirements of these specifications. D. Coordination: Finish Hardware Supplier shall examine Shop Drawings of the plastic laminate-faced door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer and hollow metal manufacturer and assume responsibility for coordination of all special details and requirements with each door and frame supplier. E. Templates: Furnish 2 copies of all necessary templates and a detailed “Template Transmittal” letter to the plastic laminate-face door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer, and hollow metal manufacturer within 48 hours after receipt of the reviewed final Finish Hardware Schedule.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Finish Hardware Schedule: 1. Within 30 calendar days after award of Contract for general construction, and before any materials are ordered, submit for review 8 copies of the complete Finish Hardware Schedule.

OEMA-2019-145 FINISH HARDWARE 087100-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. The Schedule shall clearly indicate swing, location, stile type, size and thickness of each door, including meeting stile conditions, as well as the manufacturer, type, number, and finish of each item of hardware required. The degree of swing for all doors must be specifically indicated. C. Samples: 1. Upon request, submit samples of hardware items for review. 2. Samples that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the Work. D. Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Submit to General Contractor for inclusion in the O&M manuals, as specified in Section 013300 “Submittals”, copies of the final approved Hardware Schedule, Key Schedule, installation instruction sheets and maintenance recommendations.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hardware Items for Installation by Others: Deliver to the aluminum door/frame manufacturer or installer and the plastic laminate-faced door/frame manufacturer in one shipment each, clearly marked to identify the job and door locations for which the hardware items are intended. B. Delivery and Storage: Upon delivery to site, General Contractor shall assume responsibility for hardware against all losses, defacement, etc. 1. All items shall be clearly identified. Label each item with manufacturer's name and designation for the item. Each keyed lock or cylinder shall be clearly marked for use on a specific door. 2. Each container or package shall contain the necessary fasteners, templates, and instructions for installation. C. Keys: Do not deliver to site nor store keys on-site. Deliver keys directly from manufacturer to Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONS A. Items listed in the Hardware Sets shall be manufactured by the named manufacturer and furnished without substitution. B. Screws and Fastenings: Furnish Phillips head screws and bolts for all items of hardware. No TEK screws allowed. 1. Furnish all thresholds with expansion anchors, of type that allow for removal of fastener without affecting the holding value of the expansion anchor, and machine screws. 2. Furnish hinges for hollow metal and aluminum doors and/or frames with self-cleaning machine screws. 3. Furnish 5% surplus fasteners for all items of hardware. C. Closers: Hydraulically controlled, full rack and pinion in operation, with adjustable general speed, latching speed, separate back-check control, and adjustable spring tension conforming to accessibility codes. 1. Closer fluid shall be “all weather” type not subject to normal temperature changes. 2. Select the closer type that will mount closer on the less commonly seen side of interior doors and on the interior side of exterior doors. 3. Where parallel-arm closers are indicated, furnish units one size larger than recommended for standard arm units.

087100-2 FINISH HARDWARE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Accessories: Furnish the necessary arms, brackets, and other accessories to clear overhead stops and to suit the approved job conditions. 5. Adjustability of Spring Power: Provide full adjustability as required to conform to applicable Accessibility Codes.

2.02. KEYING A. Key Schedule: Shall be prepared by the Finish Hardware Supplier, in consultation with Owner before any locks are ordered. The keying designations used in the Schedule shall conform to DHI’s “Keying System and Nomenclature.” B. Key Control: Furnish all locks and cylinders with a visual key control system. All keys and corresponding cylinder faces shall be stamped with the applicable key group indicated in the Finish Hardware Schedule. All keys shall be stamped “Do Not Duplicate”. No other stamping shall appear on keys. C. Keys: All locks shall be keyed by the manufacturer and all keys shall be factory registered and recorded. Deliver 1 copy of the key bitting list to the Owner on request. 1. Furnish all locks and cylinders with a construction master key system. Furnish construction master keys to the Contractor via certified mail. Upon occupancy by the Owner, all keys shall be delivered to the Owner in sealed envelopes. 2. Furnish master keys for each master key group and the quantity of change keys for each key group as requested by the Owner.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. HARDWARE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Hardware shall be mounted at the following heights unless scheduled otherwise:

1. Exit Devices...... Per manufacturer's template. 2. Closers ...... Per mfr's template for each condition of door swing. 3. Butt Hinges ...... 5" - 10" - equal - equal. 4. Locks ...... 38" above floor to centerline of lever. 5. Push-Pull Sets ...... 40" above floor to centerline of mounting pad. 6. Deadlocks ...... 48" above floor to centerline of cylinder. 7. Viewers (if any) ...... as indicated on Drawings.

3.02. INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware, cut and fit as required, install the hardware item completely and then remove and store it in a secure place during the application of the finish. After completion of the finishes, re-install each hardware item. C. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer's maintenance instructions before attaching closers. Adjust so as to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence. Do not use paper, cardboard or other compressible shims to adjust butt alignment. D. Closers: Mount to provide maximum opening permitted by building construction or equipment. E. Mount lock cylinders such that key enters with its smooth edge down. F. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrips at head and jambs shall be applied to the doorstops. Secure weatherstrips to metal doors and frames with aluminum sheet metal screws finished to match weatherstripping.

OEMA-2019-145 FINISH HARDWARE 087100-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO G. Set exterior thresholds in double bead of sealant as specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.” H. Tag and index the keys. Deliver the keys to Owner at completion and acceptance of work. I. Adjust, and protect from injury all installed hardware. Cover door levers, push bars and pulls with heavy cloth until project acceptance.

3.03. QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection for Punch List: The Hardware Supplier shall inspect all hardware installed under this Section in order to verify that each item was properly installed and is operating appropriately. The Hardware Supplier shall then prepare a typewritten list of defects and errors requiring correction, which shall be attached to the Final Punch List. These inspections and reports shall continue until Final Acceptance.

3.04. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. One month after Owner occupies the Work, return to site, and adjust and check each operating item of hardware, to ensure proper operation and function. B. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer. C. Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

END 087100.

087100-4 FINISH HARDWARE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Glazing of exterior windows with vision glazing. 2. Glazing of aluminum entrance vestibules, sidelights, transoms and doors. 3. Glazing of lites in flush doors. 4. Furnishing and installation of clear glazing and clamp support hardware in opening(s) of interior partition(s) and/or atop half wall(s) as indicated on drawings. 5. Furnishing and installation of laminated glass panels and clamp support hardware at Sundae Wall. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Final cleaning of glass ...... Section 015001. 2. Glazing stops in hollow metal door (if any) ...... Section 081113. 3. Glazing stops in plastic laminate-faced doors...... Section 081513. 4. Glazing gaskets for aluminum entrances...... Section 084113. 5. Factory glazed service window ...... Section 084113.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations, including the Consumer Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201) and the safety glazing requirements of the state in which the Project resides. B. Comply with all pertinent recommendations in the “Glazing Manual” and the “Laminated Glazing Reference Manual” of the Glass Association of North America (GANA). C. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." D. Each pane of glass shall bear the manufacturer’s mark designating the type and thickness of glass and the manufacturer’s name per IBC requirements. Glass without labels imprinted onto glass shall be rejected. E. Source Limitations: Provide each type of glass and accessory from one source and one manufacturer.

1.03. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ product data describing each type of glass and glazing item, including installation clamps. For each type of exterior glass, include documentation supporting the following: 1. NFRC U-factor. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC). 3. Visible Light Transmittance.

OEMA-2019-145 GLAZING 088000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Shop Drawings: For laminated glazing, submit fabrication information, including but not limited to, edge profile and finish, edge sealing, cutouts for glazing support clamp steel pin/screw, number, type and location of support clamps. D. System Energy Performance Certificates for Exterior Glazing: For glazing, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront. E. Guarantees and Warranties: 1. Submit installer’s written guarantee of leakproof installation. 2. Submit insulated glass fabricator’s warranty of seal integrity. F. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test reports. Include documentation, from manufacturer of interlayer of laminated glazing, of approval of proposed glazing sealant. G. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and maintaining laminated glass, clear glass and glass with applied coatings.

1.05. COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. B. Coordinate selection of insulated glazing with framing product being provided under Section 084113 “Aluminum Storefront Systems” to provide an assembly that meets System Energy Performance requirements specified herein and in Section 084113.

1.06. PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, laminate interlayer, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

1.07. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. Avoid deformation of units. Protect faces from scratches and abrasion. B. Deliver glazing materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original labels attached to each piece of glass. Provide safety labels imprinted onto tempered glass. Provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage. C. Store glass on edge, under cover and protect from staining. D. Do not rotate or “pitch” glass about corners. Use rolling blocks. E. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

088000-2 GLAZING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.08. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.09. WARRANTIES A. Installer’s Guarantee: Installer shall guarantee installed work to be waterproof for a period of 5 years. B. Manufacturer's Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units, including labor for glazing, that deteriorate within ten (10) years. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. C. Manufacturer's Warranty for Laminated Glass: Laminated glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated glass units, including labor for glazing, that deteriorate within five (10) years. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. D. All warranty time periods shall begin at Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State in which the project resides, to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

OEMA-2019-145 GLAZING 088000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. F. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

2.02. GLASS PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Pilkington North America. 3. PPG / Vitro Glass. B. Acceptable Glass Fabricators: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 3. Trulite Glass. 4. Viracon, Inc. 5. Or as specifically named.

C. General: Temper individual glass units as required to meet safety requirements and as otherwise shown on Drawings. Label each tempered pane with imprinted safety label. D. Types and Qualities: Where indicated on Drawings, where required by applicable codes and where required to comply with performance requirements, provide fully tempered float glass. Where not required to be fully tempered, provide heat strengthened float glass. These requirements shall apply to both panes of insulated glass. 1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: 1/4" thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear) or| Class 2 (tinted), Quality Q3. 2. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or| Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3. a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 3. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or| Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3. a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

E. Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. Provide manufacturer’s standard spacer and dual sealing system with primary and secondary sealants. Insulating Units shall have the following performance: 1. Glazing Energy Performance - Insulated glazing shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements: a. Maximum U-factor: 0.29 (center of glazing value) b. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.40 (center of glazing value) c. Minimum Visible Light Transmittance: 70% d. Basis of Design: PPG Glass “Solarban 60 (2) Clear + Clear” for exterior lite. Provide specified product or Architect approved comparable product. Comparable products must be comparable in all characteristics including visual appearance. 2. System Energy Performance - Insulated glazing and framing assembly together shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements: a. Maximum U-factor for Fixed Fenestration: 0.29

088000-4 GLAZING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO b. Maximum U-factor for Entrance Doors (w/ greater than 50% glazing): 0.77 c. Maximum U-factor for Hollow Metal Doors (w/ less than 50% glazing): 0.37 d. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.40 3. Clear Insulating Glass Units: 1 inch thick units (fully tempered where indicated), consisting of an outer minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear float glass and an inner minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear float glass separated by a 1/2 inch desiccated air/gas space, with a low reflective low- emissivity (Low-E) coating on the #2 or #3 surface. a. For exterior doors, where scheduled, furnish 1 inch thick clear insulating units meeting above requirements. b. Units shall have manufacturer’s 10-year warranty.

F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with ionomeric polymer interlayer (for resistance to moisture deterioration) to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. Nominal unit thickness shall be 9/16 inch, as required by clamp support hardware, increase thickness if structurally necessary. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements of installation and use but not less than 0.060 inch thick. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear. 4. Flat Polished Edges: Grind smooth and polish exposed laminated glass edges and corners. Edges and corners shall be eased.

2.03. CLAMP SUPPORT HARDWARE A. At Side and Bottom Supported Glazing Panels: C.R. Laurence Company Z-Series Square Type Flat Base Clamps, Model Number Z906BS including gaskets and steel pins with grommets. B. At Bottom Only Supported Glazing Panels (Sundae Wall): C.R. Laurence Company Low Profile Surface Mount Frameless Windscreen Clamps, Model number AFWC4SBS including moisture barrier glazing gaskets, stainless steel base flange cover for concealed attachment and stainless steel glazing anchorage screws.

2.04. GLAZING MATERIALS A. Approved Manufacturers: Use products recommended by glazing manufacturer and compatible with materials they are in contact with. B. Glazing Seals for Aluminum Sash: Furnished by aluminum sash manufacturer. C. Glazing Seals for Exterior Hollow Metal Door Lite: Subject to compatibility testing: 1. Exterior Side: One-part acrylic terpolymer or one-part silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, G, A. 2. Interior Side: Preformed, pre-shimmed polyisobutylene-butyl rubber adhesive faced, sealant tape and custom extruded elastomer gasket material, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.3 or 806.3. D. Glazing Seals for Interior Plastic Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Glazing Tape: Preformed, polyisobutylene-butyl rubber adhesive faced, sealant tape, with or without continuous shim as required, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.3 or 806.3. 2. Glazing Felt: Wool felt with adhesive back, treated to be non-wicking and non-staining. E. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants used, width of rabbet less 1/16" by lengths sufficient for weight of glass supported. F. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants used.

OEMA-2019-145 GLAZING 088000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO G. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

2.05. FABRICATION A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Exposed Edge Finishing: Finish edges smooth and polished, without chips, scratches, or warps. a. Finished Edge: Flat polished with eased edges. b. Edge Seals: Factory seal edges where recommended by glazing manufacturer.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Condition of Surfaces: 1. Examine all surfaces and dimensions prior to application and notify General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to satisfactory glazing. 2. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Inspect each piece of glass before installation, and eliminate any that have observable edge damage or face imperfections.

3.02. PREPARATION A. Clean the glazing channel or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Prepare metal surfaces as indicated by manufacturer of sealant to be used. Verify that weep holes are free of obstructions. B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Cut glass with smooth straight edges to full sizes required by openings. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated. D. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF GLASS A. General: 1. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

088000-6 GLAZING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 8. Install with proper bite and clearances all around. 9. Glass having waviness shall be set with waves placed horizontally. Lites viewed in series or as a group shall have uniform draw, bow and similar characteristics. B. Aluminum Windows: Glaze with Dry Gasket method, the same as for aluminum entrances. C. Aluminum Entrances: Glaze with Dry Gasket method as follows: 1. Install gaskets according to gasket manufacturer’s recommendations, including the use of primers and adhesives. 2. Cut fixed-stop gaskets to lengths required and fit into sash without stretching or compressing. Miter corners of gaskets and seal corners by vulcanizing, welding or dabbing with butyl sealant. 3. Engage gasket material with retainers in removable stops and trim to proper lengths. Verify that when gaskets are properly fit they will attain full contact all around perimeter and exert a pressure of at least 4 pounds per linear inch of glass when snapped into place. Seal corners between removable stops by dabbing with butyl sealant. D. Exterior Lites In Hollow Metal Door (if any): Glaze with Tape and Sealant method as follows: 1. Cut preformed sealant tape to proper length on a clean, flat work surface prior to application. Apply tape to permanent stops slightly in from edge of stop (to entire length of head and sill first, then in between to the jambs). Butt tape together with no overlap. Remove paper facing and daub butted corner joints with sealant. 2. Maintain a 1/8" minimum clearance for glazing material between glass and sash, both on the interior and exterior. 3. Center glass in opening and firmly place against tape. 4. Fill gap between glass and removable stop with continuous bead of silicone sealant, maintaining a 3/16" minimum bite to glass and a positive bond to stop. 5. Cap the tape with a continuous bead of silicone sealant. Apply cap bead of same sealant over glazing at removable stops. Tool sealant bead with solvent to produce a smooth surface sloped away from glass. Clean the glass of excess sealant. E. Viewers (if any): Install per manufacturer’s written instructions, provide air and moisture seal at face of door. F. Interior Lites: Glaze the lites using glazing felt or glazing tape adhered to stops on each side of the pane. Use as many layers of felt or tape as required to hold glass snuggly. Maintain even sightlines, trimming felt or tape as necessary.

OEMA-2019-145 GLAZING 088000-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO G. Interior Panels: Install glazing panels (shown installed with clamp hardware), level and straight without warp or twist and with manufacturer recommended bite on glazing panel. 1. At Z-Series Clamps: Utilize rubber gaskets and steel pin with grommets for additional glazing support.

2. At Windscreen Clamps: Utilize moisture barrier glazing gaskets and stainless steel screws for glazing support.

H. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

I. All glass shall be left whole, free from checks or other defects. Any defective glass that may appear after cleaning shall be removed and replaced with perfect glass.

3.04. PROTECTION

A. Provide protective coverings to prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END 088000.

088000-8 GLAZING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Gypsum board for interior walls. 2. Gypsum board for interior flush ceilings and bulkheads. 3. Gypsum board for covering vapor retarder. 4. Texture finishes for gypsum board. 5. Cementitious backer board for wall finishes where shown. 6. Metal stud framing for interior partitions so designated. 7. Acoustical sealants. 8. Joint treatment and gypsum board accessories. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Cutting and patching gypsum board incidental to work ...... Section 015001. 2. Wood blocking in steel stud framing...... Section 061000. 3. Thermal & acoustical batt insulation in walls ...... Section 072100. 4. Vapor retarder at exterior walls (and ceiling where shown)...... Section 072100. 5. Sealants exposed to view ...... Section 079200. 6. Ceramic wall tile...... Section 093013. 7. Resinous flooring base...... Section 096724. 8. Finish painting ...... Section 099000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products of this section shall be of a single manufacturer, or acceptable to board manufacturer, as necessary to maintain compatibility of materials.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Provide Product Data on each type of gypsum board, texture finish, cementitious backer board, metal framing, edge beads, control joints and joint compounds. C. Samples: Provide three (3), 12” x 12” square size, samples for each texture finish indicated, on same backing indicated for the Work, for Owner’s approval. Resubmit until texture is accepted by Owner.

1.04. MOCK-UP A. Verify with Owner if mock-up of gypsum board texture is required. B. If requested by Owner, provide mock-up, minimum 5’-0” x 5’-0” in size, to demonstrate full range of variation in texture to be expected and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Mock-up shall be constructed on same type of gypsum board substrate to be used in project with at least one joint illustrating taping materials and workmanship to be provided.

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Materials shall be delivered to site in original packages or containers bearing manufacturer’s brand name and type of material. B. Store materials in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. Protect board and materials from damage by moisture, ground dampness, heat, sun and other causes.

OEMA-2019-145 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. Gypsum and cementitious panels shall be supported flat and level during transport and storage. Provide supports across width of panels, not more than 16" apart. Store boards above ground or slab. D. Protect all finished work during the progress of gypsum board work and repair any damage done to such work.

1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with most stringent requirements of ASTM C 840, gypsum board manufacturer’s written instructions or requirements specified herein. 1. A uniform room temperature between 55°F and 70°F shall be maintained in cold weather one week prior to application, during application and until completely dry. Temperature fluctuations shall not exceed 2°F per 24 hours. 2. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 3. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 4. Gypsum board subcontractor shall provide adequate ventilation for drying out of joint compounds without allowing rapid drying.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs: Zinc coated steel channel studs, 20-gauge, 6" and 3-5/8" size and as indicated on Drawings, conforming to ANSI/ASTM C 645 or GA 201 or GA 216. B. Runner Tracks: 20-gauge metal, matching stud width.

2.02. PANELS

A. Gypsum Board for Most Walls: Type X, standard taper, rounded edge, conforming to ASTM C 1396, 5/8" thick.

B. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board (where noted on Drawings): ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces with tapered long edges. 1. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. C. Gypsum Board for Ceilings & Bulkheads: Type X, standard taper, rounded edge, 5/8" thick. D. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325 Type A, with manufacturer's standard edges. Mold resistance, ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Reinforced portland cement panels. Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: 1. “Gold Bond PermaBase Cement Board” by National Gypsum Co. 2. “Durock” by U.S.G. Industries. 3. “Util-A-Crete” by FinPan, Inc.

2.03. FINISH MATERIALS A. Edge and Corner Reinforcement: 1. Corner Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic with extra wide flanges, equal to USG “B1XW EL” or No-Coat “Ultracorner”. 2. Edge Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic “L” type with extra wide flanges, equal to USG “B4 (1")” or No-Coat “L Trim”. 3. Control Joint Beads: Flexible expansion channel, such as USG #093 or Gold Bond “.093 Zinc Control Joint.”

092116-2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Reinforcing Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper joint reinforcing tape, perforated or high porosity paper to create strong bond with compounds. 2. Reinforcing Tape for Cementitious Backer Board: 2" wide, adhesive faced, 10 x 10 mesh fiberglass with polymer, alkali-resistant coating. 3. Joint Compound for Gypsum Board: Ready mixed all-purpose gypsum board joint compound, type and mix as required for conditions of humidity and temperature. Use topping type compound for finishing coats. C. Non-Aggregate Textured Finish: Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company; Proform Wall and Ceiling Spray. c. United States Gypsum Company; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. 2. Texture: Orange peel.

2.04. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Acoustical Seals: One of the following: 1. USG “Acoustical Sealant” 2. Tremco “Acoustical Sealant” 3. Pecora “Acoustical Sealant BA-98” 4. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics “Norseal V730 / Norseal V740FR Acoustical Foam Tapes” B. Fasteners: Screws meeting ASTM C 954 and the following: 1. For metal to metal framing: 1/2" long, Type S, shallow pan-head screws. 2. For attachment of metal framing to wood: 1-1/4" Type W screws. 3. For cementitious backer board board: Corrosion resistant, flat-head countersunk or thin washer-head screws. 4. For regular gypsum board: 1-1/4" Type S bugle-head screws. 5. For tracks to concrete: Powder-actuated stud pins sized to penetrate concrete at least 1/2".

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine and inspect materials to which gypsum board and cementitious backer board are to be applied. Report any damp conditions and verify that cause of dampness is rectified before beginning gypsum board installation. B. Before beginning installation of gypsum board walls and ceilings, verify that work to be enclosed by gypsum board, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been completed, inspected and approved by the governing authority. C. Verify that penetrations in partitions (such as electrical outlets, etc.) will not be located back to back but will be separated by at least 2 studs. Report to Contractor any such conditions and do not proceed with work until situations have been rectified.

3.02. STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks, straight and true, accurately aligned to the layout at base and at tops of studs. Set floor track in a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Secure track at each end and a maximum of 24" o.c. in between. Use powder actuated pin anchors for anchoring to concrete. B. Set studs plumb, not more than 16" o.c. In each line of studs, face flanges all in the same direction.

OEMA-2019-145 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO C. All studs shall extend full height to structure above. D. Studs shall engage both floor and top runners. Secure studs to tracks with 2 screws at top and 2 screws at bottom, one each at both inside and outside flanges. E. At top track, provide compressible filler strip at least 1/2" thick between top runners and structure above. Provide multiple runner track installation to accommodate ceiling deflection. F. Do not cut stud flanges to accommodate pipes, conduit, etc.

3.03. ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION A. Verify that penetrations for ducts or structural framing in gypsum board constructions have been made soundproof, using furring, acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant as required. B. Verify that all electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations are surrounded with sound attenuation blanket extending at least 12" around the opening. C. Apply acoustical sealant to seal all cutouts, such as at electrical boxes and conduit. D. Apply sealant continuously to joint between gypsum board and bottom of all interior partition framing. Also seal any untaped edges or corner joints butting into other wall materials. E. Ensure that control joints are filled with insulation.

3.04. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Do not commence installation until insulation batts and all items to be installed inside partitions or above ceilings are in place and have been inspected and approved by the governing authority. B. Install gypsum wallboard first to ceilings, then to walls and soffits. Allow the joint between ceiling and wall to “float,” holding ceiling screws back 7" from intersection and wall screws back 8". C. Install gypsum board panels to walls and ceilings in single layer construction. D. Install boards for walls with tapered edges vertical, in line with framing. 1. Hold gypsum wall boards approximately 3/8" up from floors. 2. Provide gypsum board on both sides of partition studs above ceilings. Extend board until flush with top of framing. E. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with approved sealant. F. Ceilings and Soffits: Erect boards with tapered edges perpendicular to supports. Place panel end joints only over supports and stagger end joints adjacent to one another. G. Attachment: Install gypsum board with gypsum board screws 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along edges. 1. Place edge screws 3/8" in from edges. Stagger screws in adjacent sheets on opposite sides of joints. Screws shall proceed from central portion of board toward ends and edges. 2. Screws shall be driven home slightly below the surface of the board without breaking the paper. Keep screw-driving clutches properly adjusted. H. Joints: 1. Boards shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place. Butt tapered edges only to tapered edges. 2. Locate all joints parallel to framing members only over the center of framing members. Joints on opposite sides of partition shall not occur on the same stud. 3. Joints intersecting openings, such as for doors or windows, shall be held at least 12" away from any corner; and joints parallel to sides of door or window openings shall be held at least 12" away from the opening. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists

092116-4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

3.05. CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. B. Erect panels with manufacturer’s recommended corrosion resistant screws, placing vertical and horizontal edges of panels over firm bearing. C. Add framing as required to support all edges on framing. D. Treat cut edges, holes and joints in cementitious backer board in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. E. Attach panels with manufacturer’s recommended corrosion resistant screws 8” o.c. along edges and each framing member.

3.06. FINISHING A. Corner and Edge Beads: 1. All vertical and horizontal external corners below the plane of the ceiling, except ceramic tile backer board, shall be reinforced with corner bead fastened in a full bed of joint compound. 2. At all exposed edges and where board terminates against windows or other dissimilar materials, apply metal trim over board edge and fasten in a full bed of joint compound. 3. Use longest lengths practicable. Keep beads straight and plumb. B. Joint Reinforcement: 1. All joints not covered by a corner bead are to be taped and compounded, above and below ceilings. 2. Joint tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded in a uniformly thin layer of joint compound approximately 4" wide with sufficient material under tape to provide proper bond. 3. Cementitious Backer Board: Tack fiberglass tape over joints (for embedment by ceramic tile installers). C. Compounding and Finishing: Sand each coat after compound has dried, as necessary to provide smooth finished result in surfaces to be painted or to receive wall covering. Take care not to scuff paper surface of board when sanding. 1. Use topping compound for final joint coating of painted gypsum board. 2. Flush Joints between Panels Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound and covered with 2 coats of compound, except that first covering coat shall extend to 3" beyond each edge of bedding coat, and second covering coat shall extend to 3" beyond each edge of previous coat. Feather the coats onto adjoining surfaces. 3. Internal Corners Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound and covered with 1 coat of compound, using methods similar to field joints. 4. External Corners and Edges Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. cover the flanges of corner and casing beads with 3 coats of compound, except that second and third coats are to be extended 3" beyond the previous coat. 5. Fastener Dimples Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. 3 coats of compound, including the spreading of each coat beyond the previous coat. 6. Joints and Corners above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound.

OEMA-2019-145 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 7. Fastener Dimples above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. no compound required.

3.07. APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Extent of Texture Finishes: Provide texture on gypsum board wall surfaces in public areas that are scheduled to receive paint finish. B. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. C. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. D. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written instructions.

3.08. PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from joint compound and texture finishes. Promptly remove overspray, drips, etc. from floors and other non-gypsum board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during gypsum board application according to recommendations of manufacturer of finish that was damaged. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END 092116.

092116-6 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Ceramic paver tile floors and base. 2. Waterproofing membrane. 3. Ceramic tile walls. 4. Ceramic tile wall accent areas. 5. Edge trim for flooring, cove and wall transitions. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete finishes to receive floor tile ...... Section 033000. 2. Sealants for control joints and edges...... Section 079200. 3. Backer board to receive wall tile & base tile ...... Section 092116.

1.02. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Warranties: 1. Submit manufacturer’s sample warranty for review. 2. Submit manufacturer’s executed warranty made out to Owner. 3. Submit to Owner all documentation required for the making of claims against warranties including, but not limited to, proof of purchase. C. Maintenance Stock: Supply extra 2% of total quantity of each tile used, including base tiles (but not special shapes). Place in clean, marked cartons and deliver to Owner for Owner’s maintenance use.

1.03. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. B. Tile for each area shall come from the same shade and lot number.

1.04. JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature limits (50°F) and installation practices as recommended by mortar and grout materials manufacturer.

1.05. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that the installed system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion. The Manufacturer shall replace materials that have failed and reimburse the Owner for labor costs, not to exceed per square-foot cost of original installation, to remove failed products and install replacement products.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Ceramic paver tile and ceramic tile units provided shall be as noted on drawings.

OEMA-2019-145 CERAMIC TILE 093013-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2.02. TILE TRIM A. General: 1. Contractor shall verify all trim model numbers for correct trim size to protect tile provided. 2. Miter corners of trim when changing direction unless trim type has prefabricated corner units. B. TR-1 - Transition Edge Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Carpet: Extruded aluminum, having a carpet-covering cap connected to a raised leg of height to match exposed face of tile, configured for mounting by way of an under-tile flange, “RENO-TK” (AETK 100) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. For curved/radius tile edge transitions to carpet, use “RENO-TK-R” (AETK 100 radius). C. TR-2 & 3 - Transition Edge Trim between Wall Ceramic Tile at Outside Corners: Extruded aluminum, bullnose-type profile with symmetrically rounded visible surface with 1/4" radius, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer, “RONDEC” ( TR-2 = RO 100 AE) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. Provide accessories, of matching material and finish where exposed, as follows: 1. Outside Corners (TR-3): One leg (EV/RO 100 AE) or two leg (E2L/RO 100 AE) as condition requires. 2. Connectors: V/RO 100. 3. Top End Cap. D. TR-4 - Transition Edge Trim to Protect Exposed Tile Edge (such as at cut paver tile base and wainscot, at wall tile and gypsum board wall): Extruded aluminum, L-shaped profile with 1/8 inch wide visible surface on top of vertical leg of height to match exposed face of tile and a horizontal trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, with integrated grout joint spacer, “SCHIENE” (AE 100) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. E. TR-5, 6 &7 - Transition Radius Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Wall Ceramic Tile (Cove Base): Extruded aluminum profile with integrated trapezoid perforated anchoring leg, connected at a 90- degree angle by a cove shaped section with 3/8" radius that forms the visible surface, “DILEX-AHK” (TR-5 = AHK 1S 100 AE) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. Provide accessories, of matching material and finish where exposed, as follows: 1. Outside Corners (TR-6): E 90/AHK 1S/AE 2. Inside Corners (TR-7): I 90/AHK 1S/AE 3. Connectors: V/AHK. 4. End Cap: E/AHK 1S/AE F. TR-8 - Transition Edge Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Resinous Flooring: Extruded aluminum, L-shaped profile with 1/8 inch wide visible surface on top of vertical leg of height to match exposed face of tile and a horizontal trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, with integrated grout joint spacer, “SCHIENE” (AE ***) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish.

2.03. SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Waterproof / Crack Isolation Membrane: “RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane” as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. B. Floor Setting Material: ProLite Premium large Format Tile Mortar as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. C. Wall Setting Material: ProLite Premium large Format Tile Mortar as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. 1. Where glass tile is scheduled, verify compatibility of setting material with glass tile backing. Provide light color setting materials where recommended by manufacturer. D. Grout: Use sanded grout only after determining sanded grout will not damage tile surface by testing on samples of each type of tile to be used with sanded grout.

093013-2 CERAMIC TILE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Floor Epoxy Grout: “CEG-Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout” as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. 2. Floor Standard Grout: Prism Ultimate Performance Grout as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. 3. Wall Grout: Prism Ultimate Performance Grout as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. E. Floor Patching/Leveling Compound: High strength thin setting leveling compound, free of cellulose and salts, intended for interior use: 1. “Skim coat & Patch Cement Underlayment” with “Patching and Leveling Latex Additive” by Custom Building Products, no substitutions. F. Water: Clean and drinkable.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which tile work is to be installed. Perform slab moisture tests, relative humidity tests, and other tests as required by setting and grouting materials manufacturers. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Level out floor, filling depressions with floor patching/leveling compound. C. Except for shrinkage cracks, repair cracks in substrate. Extend patching fabric so that it will be under at least 3 tiles on each side of the crack. D. Cementitious Tile Backer Board: Joints to be completed by tile setters. Pack gaps with latex- modified thin-set mortar and embed joint tape into the mortar.

3.02. INSTALLATION A. Floor Tile with Epoxy Grout: Thin-set in accordance with ANSI Specification A-108.5 (Reference TCNA detail F115: Waterproof/Crack Isolation Membrane; Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Epoxy Grout). B. Base for Floor Tile with Epoxy Grout: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Epoxy Grout). C. Floor Tile with Standard Grout: Thin-set in accordance with ANSI Specification A-108.5 (Reference TCNA detail F113: Waterproof/Crack Isolation Membrane (where shown); Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Latex-Portland Cement Grout). D. Base for Floor Tile with Standard Grout: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Latex-Portland Cement Grout). E. Ceramic Tile Walls in Food Preparation Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Epoxy Grout). F. Ceramic Tile Walls in Toilet Rooms: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Latex-Portland Cement Grout). G. Ceramic Tile Accents in Customer Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar; Latex-Portland Cement Grout). H. Inside wall corner joints with wall tile on both sides of corner: Rake out joint; install sealant full length of corner, not grout. Sealant color shall match grout color.

OEMA-2019-145 CERAMIC TILE 093013-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO I. Extent of Floor Tile: Extend to walls, under casework, fixtures and equipment, except where noted otherwise. J. Extent of Base: Install ceramic tile base, as scheduled, at the perimeters of all work of this Section. K. Tile Base Installation: Cut floor tile to create base tile. Do not used tile with chipped face or uneven cuts that will be exposed in finish installation. Install with edge trim to conceal cut edge. Install with cove trim where indicated. L. Wall Tile Outside Corner Trim: Install outside corner trim at all wall tile locations. Trim shall extend from top of base tile to top of wall tile. M. Uniformity of Color Variations: Set tile in each area using only tile from the same shade and lot number. Mix tiles from several boxes, and rotate the tiles to ensure a non-repeat appearance. N. Alignment of Wall Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both horizontal and vertical. O. Alignment of Floor Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both parallel and perpendicular to the walls. Align joints in base with joints in floor. P. Minimum Tile Sizes: Lay out all tile work so as to avoid cuts less than one-half tile in size. Q. Control Joints: Control joints in substrates must be continued through tile work. R. Edges Trim at Dissimilar Floor Materials: Install edge trim at all exposed edges of ceramic tile flooring. Edging shall be one continuous piece at doors and wherever standard lengths permit. Securely fasten edging to substrate. S. Door Frames: Rake out grout between ceramic wall tile and doorframes for installation of sealant under Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.” T. Grout: 1. Use only unsanded grout for floors. 2. Sanded grout. Finish the grout even with bottom of cushion edges on tile. 3. Before grouting tile, seal the tiles with a sealer recommended by the tile manufacturer.

3.03. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use neutral cleaner. Acid solutions NOT PERMITTED. 2. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. B. Protection: 1. When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 2. Protect installed tile floors with kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage and wear. 3. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days, preferably 7 days, after installation. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces.

END 093013.

093013-4 CERAMIC TILE OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 095113 - LAY-IN CEILINGS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Lay-in panel ceilings, including suspension systems and accessories. 2. Hangers for support of recessed light fixtures in acoustical ceilings as required. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Suspended gypsum board ceilings ...... Section 092116. 2. HVAC registers, grills and ductwork...... Mech. Specs. 3. Lights and other electrical items ...... Elect. Drawings.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the erection of the selected systems. B. Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of current CISCA “Ceiling Systems Handbook” except as specified otherwise hereinafter. Maintain a copy of the handbook at the site for Architect’s inspection while work of this Section is being accomplished.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit data from manufacturer’s brochures describing each product to be used. C. Maintenance Stock: Deliver to site for future maintenance not less than 1 unopened bundle of lay-in ceiling units of each type.

1.04. JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver acoustical ceiling materials until spaces have been enclosed and made weather-tight and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those to be maintained during final occupancy. B. Do not install acoustical ceilings until work above lay-in ceilings, particularly mechanical and electrical work, has been completed, inspected and approved.

1.05. WARRANTIES A. Ceiling Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard 30 year warranty that products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship, and when subjected to the allowable conditions of temperature and humidity, will be free of visible sag, mold and mildew.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Metal Suspension System: 15/16 inch exposed face, rigid metal, interlocking cross tees and main tee runners with flush joints at intersections, complying with ASTM C 635. Provide matching wall angle molding and all accessories for a complete system. See Drawings for specific systems and their locations.

OEMA-2019-145LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. System Duty Level: Provide suspension system duty level as required to support items penetrating ceilings, including light fixtures and HVAC outlets/inlets, and as required by ASTM C 635, but not less than that specified. 2. Provide system components and accessories as required to meet seismic design category indicated. 3. Specialty Systems: “Compasso Curved” ceiling trim (height as noted on drawings) by USG or comparable equal products. B. Tile & Panels: As noted on drawings. C. Accessory Materials: 1. Sealer for Edge of Cut Tiles: As furnished by tile manufacturer, color to match tiles. 2. Hanger Wire: Pre-stretched, galvanized, soft-annealed mild steel wire conforming to ASTM A 641, minimum 12-gauge. Provide thicker gauge where necessary to meet seismic design codes requirements. 3. Hanger Anchor Studs: Screws with deep throat threads having forged wire suspension eyelet, cadmium-plated; such as by I-Lag, tel: 805-523-9148, or Abesco's “Drop-Ceiling Anchor Screws” tel: 800-843-2738.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Verify that work above ceilings, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been completed, inspected and approved before beginning installation of acoustical ceiling panel system. B. Installer shall be responsible for all conditions affecting proper installation of his materials and shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION OF PANEL/TILE SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Install intermediate duty suspension systems in compliance with ASTM C 636. Space tee runners at 4'-0" centers and hang by direct suspension from structure above. Install interlocking cross tees to form 2ft x 2ft and 2ft. x 4ft grids as indicated. a. Layout: Border units shall be equal in size at opposite walls and shall be at least 12" in width, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. b. Runners: Shall be straight, true to line, with exposed surfaces flush and level. B. Suspension: Suspend main runners with wires placed 4'-0" o.c. Install wires plumb and free of kinks, attached by looping and wire-tying directly to eyelet anchor studs. 1. Suspend only from bottom of wood framing for roof structure. Do not suspend from gypsum board, bridging or suspended equipment (e.g. pipes and ducts). 2. Keep wires from touching ducts and pipes. Non-plumb wires shall be matched by countersloping wires or counterbracing. 3. Where the Drawings show a lay-in light fixture, support the ceiling suspension grid with hanger wires placed within 6" of each corner of the fixture. C. Install perimeter supporting wall trim where border units abut walls or other vertical surfaces. Miter the joints at outside corners of walls. D. Properly seat grid members at all joint, including at perimeter supporting wall / closure trim. Attach tees to perimeter supporting wall / closure trim, with manufacturer’s recommended clips designed for application. Pop rivets will not be permitted.

095113-2 LAY-IN CEILINGS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.03. INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN CEILING PANELS A. Install panels to bear equally and uniformly on the grid system on all four sides, with adjacent edges parallel and equally spaced. Install panels with direction of mill pattern aligned in one direction. Panel faces shall form a true plane. B. Hold-Down Clips: Anchor the panels with hold down clips when within 20ft of an exterior door. Clips shall be omitted where access to mechanical work in ceiling plenum above is required. Check Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for access locations. C. Border panels shall fit the suspension grid and the wall angle such that panels will not skew or show voids. D. When cutting border panels, rabbet the cut edge of the panel and seal the cut area with factory furnished sealer in color to match.

3.04. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of units and leave free of defects. Replace units that cannot be cleaned to factory-new condition. B. Remove and replace units that are damaged, warped or improperly installed.

END 095113.

OEMA-2019-145LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 096518 – HYBRID CARPET

1. GENERAL 1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included in this Section Features: 1. Preparation of surfaces to receive hybrid carpet. 2. Installation of hybrid carpet. 3. Vinyl base at perimeter walls. 4. Metal edge trim. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete floor finishing...... Section 033000. 2. Edging at ceramic tile ...... Section 093013. 1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain hybrid carpeting of each type and color from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. 1. Obtain components, including leveling and patching compounds, for hybrid carpeting system from the same manufacturer as hybrid carpeting or from a manufacturer approved by the hybrid carpeting manufacturer. B. Installer’s Qualifications: Hybrid carpet installation company shall be certified by hybrid carpet manufacturer and shall have at least 5 years satisfactory experience in the installation of the type specified. Only qualified and experienced hybrid carpet mechanics working under proper supervision shall be employed on the project. C. Flammability Test Requirements: Provide only materials, including adhesives, which will produce an installation having the following properties: 1. Critical Radiant Flux of at least 0.45 watts per square centimeter, Class I, when tested according to ASTM E 648. 2. Maximum Specific Optical Density (Smoke Generation) of 450 or less when tested according to ASTM E 662. 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Certifications: 1. Include certified laboratory test report for flammability requirements. 2. Manufacturer shall submit certification that Installer is a factory approved installer. C. Maintenance Supply: 1. Furnish additional hybrid carpet material for maintenance purposes equal to approximately 5% of hybrid carpet installed. Half of the material furnished shall be in pieces no less than 3 square yards. Of the remainder, no piece may be less than 1/2 square yard. 2. Package the hybrid carpet repair remnants neatly in wrapper suitable for preservation of hybrid carpet in long term storage. Deliver packaged remnants to building. 3. Furnish to the Owner in labeled boxes for future maintenance not less than 2% of wall base installed. D. Maintenance Manuals:

OEMA-2019-145HYBRID CARPET 096518-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Obtain from manufacturer and submit for Owner's use, 3 copies of manufacturer’s complete maintenance recommendations for hybrid carpet installed. 2. Obtain from the installers of hybrid carpet, and submit in Operations and Maintenance Manual for Owners use, 3 copies of all concrete slab testing specified herein and additionally required by hybrid carpet manufacturer. Clearly identify each test result and include accurate plans indicating where and when each test was taken. 1.04. PRODUCT STORAGE, DELIVERY & COORDINATION A. Delivery and installation of hybrid carpet shall be coordinated with completion schedule for the various areas. B. Hybrid carpet shall be stored away from construction activities and shall be protected against moisture, dust and vermin. C. Installation shall not begin in any area until painting and ceiling work for that area have been completed. 1.05. WARRANTY A. Provide all warranties standard to the manufacturer for the hybrid carpet selected. B. Warranties shall start at an adjusted date if hybrid carpet is installed after the date of Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS 2.01. MATERIALS A. Hybrid carpet and vinyl base shall be provided as selected by Owner and as noted on drawings. B. Wall Base at walls around Carpet: Vinyl complying with ASTM F 1861, Type TV (thermoplastic vinyl), Group 1 (solid homogeneous), Style B (coved), 6" high, minimum 0.080 inch thickness. C. All hybrid carpet shall be manufactured at one time. All hybrid carpet shall be of a consistent construction throughout. D. All accessories shall be as recommended by the hybrid carpet manufacturer. E. Metal Edge Trim: Reno-TK (straight) & Reno-TK-R (curved) anodized aluminum by Schluter except as otherwise noted on drawings. F. Adhesives: 1. Water based, strippable, waterproof type, VOC compliant, asbestos free, compatible with substrate and materials, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. For outside corners in vinyl base use contact cement.

3. EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Before beginning work to lay new hybrid carpet, examine all surfaces over which work is to be applied. Verify that concrete finishes comply with requirements and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Report to the Architect in writing any surface defects and conditions that are unsuitable to receive work. B. Testing: Hybrid carpet installer shall perform tests specified below so that test locations are evenly spaced within installation areas. Perform tests in areas where drying is most restricted but not closer than 5ft to a perimeter, performing at least 3 tests for the first 1,000 SF and an additional test for each additional 1,000 SF. 1. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

096518-2 HYBRID CARPET OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Alkalinity Test: ASTM F 710. Test concrete for pH and proceed with installation only after the pH of all tests is not less than 7 nor greater than 9. 3. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by hybrid carpet manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture meter readings and plastic mat test results will not be accepted as conclusive. C. Verify that surfaces to receive vinyl base are free of sealers, oils and other bond inhibitors. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, salts, dusting, mold or mildew. D. Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of the suitability of the surfaces to receive work. Remove and replace at no charge to Owner all work under this Section which may require removal in order to correct defects caused by insufficient examination and preparation of the substrates. 3.02. PREPARATION A. Check the match of hybrid carpet rolls before cutting and ensure that there is no visible variations. B. Clean and prepare to a satisfactory condition all surfaces scheduled to receive carpet. C. Fill saw cut joints, construction joints, expansion joints, cracks and depressions in the slab with flexible vinyl filler as required to prevent show-through. 3.03. HYBRID CARPET INSTALLATION A. Install hybrid carpet using the RS System (Peel & Stick). B. Lay hybrid carpet in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Lay hybrid carpet smooth and even, cut and fit evenly along all walls and around all projections. Continue hybrid carpet into recesses and under equipment and furnishings. C. All hybrid carpet seams shall be chemically welded. Comply with hybrid carpet manufacturer’s installation instructions. D. Edges at Other Floor Materials: Install edge strips at all exposed edges of hybrid carpet except where hybrid carpet meets ceramic/paver tile; in which case, secure the hybrid carpet edge with the edging provided with the tile. Edging shall be one continuous piece at doors and wherever standard lengths permit. Securely fasten edging to floors. 1. When hybrid carpet ends at a doorway and door swings over hybrid carpet, place hybrid carpet under door (but not beyond door) and finish hybrid carpet with nose of edge strip aligned with the edge of the stop on the door frame. 2. When hybrid carpet ends at doorway and door swings away from hybrid carpet, place hybrid carpet up to face of door and finish hybrid carpet with edge strip having its nose aligned with the edge of the stop on the door frame. E. Workmanship: The completed hybrid carpet installation shall be free of ripples and puckers. 3.04. INSTALLATION OF VINYL BASE A. Install the coved base on top of hybrid carpet. B. Install base in as long lengths as practicable. Do not stretch base to fill void spaces. Do not allow joints within 16" of corners and ends of runs. C. Joints shall be tight, free of visible adhesive and adhesive residues. The tops and faces of pieces shall be flush across all joints. D. Tightly bond the base to the wall throughout its length, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. E. At outside corners, lightly V-cut the back of the base and secure to wall with contact cement. 3.05. PROTECTION A. Protect hybrid carpet after installation against stains and accumulations of dust and debris.

OEMA-2019-145HYBRID CARPET 096518-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.06. CLEANUP A. The completed installation shall be free of scraps, hybrid carpet ripples and puckers. Clean up all dirt and debris. Remove all spots with proper remover. B. Damage: Repair any damage to existing paintwork, millwork, walls, doors, floors, etc., caused by hybrid carpet installation. C. Upon completion of the installation remove all waste, excess materials, protective coverings, tools and equipment. D. Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean all new installed hybrid carpet to Owner's satisfaction. Do not begin vacuuming until perimeter resilient base has cured at least 10 days. When schedules allow, do not begin vacuuming until 14 days after installation of resilient base.

END 096518.

096518-4 HYBRID CARPET OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 096724 – RESINOUS FLOORING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Furnishing and installing seamless RF-1 hybrid resinous flooring system with integral cove base. RF-2 not used. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete substrate and floor slab water test ...... Section 033000. 2. Joint Sealants ...... Section 079200. 3. Wall Substrates ...... Section 092116. 4. Flooring transitions ...... Section 093013. 5. Floor Drains ...... See Drawings.

1.02. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. ACI 302.1R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and Food and Drug Administration (FDA) authorization for incidental contact with foodstuffs.

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. A flooring specialist with skilled mechanics having not less than 5 years’ satisfactory experience in the application of the flooring system specified. The Installer shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the flooring system and have been trained, by the flooring system manufacturer, in all phases of surface preparation and application of the specified flooring system. 2. Furnish upon Architect’s request, a listing of the projects of similar type completed by the installation crew’s foreman within the previous 3 years. Include locations, sizes of installations, products installed, dates of installation, and the contact name and phone number. B. The flooring system shall be USDA compliant. C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. D. Pre-Construction Conferences: Installer of flooring system shall meet with General Contractor, concrete installers and plumbing contractor before construction begins to establish: 1. The techniques and materials to be used by concrete finishers in preparation for the flooring system. 2. Proper floor drain elevations. E. Coordination: Flooring Installer shall attend Concrete Floor Slab Water Tests performed by Concrete Contractor to determine location of depressions in slab and assign responsibility for repair of depressions per requirements defined in Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

OEMA-2019-145 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.04. MOCKUP A. Construct, in an inconspicuous area selected by Architect, a mock-up, of minimum 4’ x 4’ size each, illustrating texture of resinous flooring to be provided on the project. Mockup shall be of full thickness and use the same materials and methods as will be used for the finish installation. 1. Mock-up shall illustrate, in addition to other required characteristics, the finish texture of the slip-resistant resinous flooring system intended to be installed as indicated on Drawings. 2. Mock-up shall include an integral cove base where the sample meets a wall surface. Provide termination accessories matching those to be installed in the final installation. B. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Owner's review of mockup. Owner will review the mockup for conformance of color to approved samples, suitability of finish texture, evenness of finished appearance and workmanship. Rework mockup until approved by Owner. C. The approved mockup shall become the standard of acceptance for all resinous flooring work. 1. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.05. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit flooring system manufacturer’s product data describing all components, including auxiliary materials and filler compounds. Include flooring system manufacturer’s specific recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials. C. Sample for Verification of Color: Submit two 12 inch square samples of the specified flooring system, in color indicated on Drawings and verified by Owner, applied to hardboard or similar rigid backing.

1. Submit additional 12 inch square samples of specified flooring system on rigid backing as requested by Owner until final color selection is made. D. Certificates:

1. Submit Installer certificate signed by flooring system manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 2. Submit certified test data confirming product’s conformance to the performance criteria specified. 3. Submit documentation (may be letter on flooring system manufacturer’s letterhead) confirming compliance with USDA requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Submit recommended maintenance procedures that will assure continued performance of the installation to its maximum potential.

1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All material shall be delivered in original manufacturer's containers with unbroken seals and with manufacturer's labels, indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components, intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry protected area between 45° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight. Protect from freezing. C. Follow all manufacturer's specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling. D. Do not use materials that have been stored longer than the product’s nominal shelf life.

096724-2 RESINOUS FLOORING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.07. JOB CONDITIONS A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 45° to 80° Fahrenheit during application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used and flooring system manufacturer has been consulted. B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew point. C. Conditions required of new concrete to be coated: 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture testing. 2. Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be used. 3. Concrete shall have a "rubbed" finish; float or darby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is neither necessary nor desirable). D. Work Force: Provide sufficient workmen and equipment so that material is applied free of “cold joints.” E. Lighting: Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 to 60 foot-candles in all areas where the resinous flooring system is being installed. Do not apply material in direct sunlight. F. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to produce a complete air exchange every five (5) minutes for safety and curing of flooring system components. G. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless flooring system manufacturer recommends a longer period.

1.08. WARRANTY A. The Installer shall furnish a standard warranty for the resinous flooring system guaranteeing that any loss of bond or cracking will be repaired without additional charge to Owner, for a period of one year.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Res-Tek Inc. 110 Riverside Drive Cartersville, Georgia 30120, PH: (770) 427-4034, (888) 737- 8351, FAX: (770) 427-4037. Manufacturer’s Representative is Joe Lasko, (770) 427-4037.

2.02. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. RF-1: The resinous flooring system shall be seamless, applied at approximately 1/4” finish thickness, consisting of PUR-Guard Cementitious Urethane HD-SL (Parts A and B) with PUR- Guard HD-SL Filler (Part C) with Colored Quartz broadcast; and two coats of MAC-925 Sealer coat. B. Color and texture will be as selected by Owner. C. The resinous flooring system shall be chemically resistant to a wide range of acids, alkalis, salts, fats, oils, and other chemicals.

2.03. MATERIALS A. Res-Tek Hybrid HD-SL Slurry Flooring System consists of: 1. Primer/Sealer (if required): PUR-Guard HD-P single component primer as recommended by flooring system manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.

OEMA-2019-145 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Integral Cove Base: Res-Tek MAC-Guard resins with flooring system manufacturer recommended PUR-Guard fillers appropriate for conditions and substrates. a. Cove Cap for Integral Cove Base: 3/16” (horizontal dimension) zinc “L” shaped termination strip for top of integral cove base. 3. Patching/Sloping (where required): PUR-Guard HD-T. 4. Topping/Base Coat: PUR-Guard HD-SL Slurry, consisting of PUR-Guard (Parts A & B) and HD-SL (Part C) Filler with Res-Tek Colored Quartz broadcast. a. Pigment: Flooring system manufacturer’s standard pigment for coloring topping / base coat. Color as selected by Owner. b. Colored Quartz (for broadcasting): Ceramic coated silica. Provide color as selected by Owner. 5. Topcoat: a. MAC-925 Sealer / Topcoat Resin: Provide two coats on entire resinous flooring system installation.

6. [Flooring Edge Strips: Provide zinc edge strip at transition between resinous flooring and ceramic paver tiles. Edge strip shall be a “L” shape. Vertical leg of edge strip shall be 1/8” thick and of height to align with top of ceramic paver tile.] 7. Accessories: Provide all components and accessories recommended by flooring system manufacturer for a complete flooring installation.

2.04. PRODUCT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. PUR-Guard HD-SL Slurry (topping / base coat): 1. VOC: 0 g/L 2. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C579): 5,800 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM C307): 950 4. Tensile Modulus, psi: 19,500 5. Chemical Resistance, (ASTM D543): Effect of weak acids: none Effect of strong acids: slight Effect of alkalis: none Effect of salt solutions: none Effect of oil, grease: none B. Res-Tek MAC-925 Sealer:

1. Percentage Reactive Resin: 100% 2. Percentage Solids: 100% 3. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): 0.5 4. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): 3,850 5. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): 470,000 6. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) in./in./deg. F: .000035 7. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: 1012

8. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: 1.43

096724-4 RESINOUS FLOORING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 9. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543: Effect of weak acids: none Effect of strong acids: slight Effect of alkalis: none Effect of salt solutions: none Effect of oil, grease: none Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): none

2.05. MIXES A. Follow flooring system manufacturer's written instructions, procedures and recommendations.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which flooring is to be installed. All deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work shall be reported to General Contractor in writing. B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable. Commencement of flooring installation will be construed as acceptance of substrate and responsibility for results obtained. C. All drains in the installation area shall be determined to be working and shall be installed level with the concrete slab surface.

3.02. PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or covers. Owner's equipment shall be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials. B. Surface Preparation – General: 1. Prepare and clean all substrates according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean and dry substrate. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air “blow-down”. 2. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper. C. Surface Preparation - Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: 1. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup and as recommended by flooring system manufacturer. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate, unless flooring system manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. 2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment. 3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum.

OEMA-2019-145 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO D. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or other contamination of the surface occurs. E. Moisture-Vapor Emissions Testing: Conduct testing to verify that slab is properly dry. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 8 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by ASTM F1869 anhydrous calcium chloride testing. F. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by flooring system manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. G. Patching and Filling (where required): Use patching and fill material to fill holes and minor depressions in substrates according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Spalls and Weak Spots: Remove weak concrete by chipping and grinding. Replace removed material with approved patching compound applied to clean, dust-free concrete. 2. Cracks: Prepare and treat cracks in slab as required to prevent them from showing in the finished flooring. Remove weak edges. Treat moving cracks as recommended in writing by flooring system manufacturer. 3. Minor Depressions: Flooring Installer shall fill depressions (less than 1/8” in depth) that occur in areas where not easily accessed for removal ponded water. Minor depressions to be filled shall have been determined by Owner at time of Concrete Floor Slab Water Test. H. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate joints to prevent joints from reflecting through resinous flooring according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. I. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. J. Edges: Where resinous flooring system ends at bare concrete, do not feather. Saw-cut the concrete to a straight and square line at the edge line. On the side to receive the flooring system, chip or grind away the concrete to 1/2” to 1” deep, to a line approximately 4" from the saw cut. 1. Center the edge line under door at doorways. 2. Fill the chipped area to a smooth surface with patching material before applying finish system. K. Drains: Chip or grind away the concrete 1/2” to 1” deep surrounding drains to a line approximately 6” from drain edge and fill with patching material as specified above for edges.

3.03. INSTALLATION A. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Refer to flooring system manufacturer's data sheets for pot-life/temperature relationship. Only mix full kits as supplied by flooring system manufacturer. B. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3.04. PRIME COAT (if required) A. Refer to flooring system manufacturer as to method of determining if prime coat is necessary. Comply with flooring system manufacturer’s recommendations based on conditions specific Project.

096724-6 RESINOUS FLOORING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO B. If primer is recommended, apply over prepared substrate at flooring system manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

3.05. INTEGRAL COVE BASE A. Install zinc cove cap to wall surface by method recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of substrate and conditions. Protect top surface of cove cap from flooring or other materials until flooring installation is complete to ensure a clean surface for adhesion of sealant. B. Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. C. Apply according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Cove base shall be a trowel-on cove base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a zinc termination strip installed at the top of the base. D. Cove base shall receive a top coat consistent with and matching that of the flooring system. E. Round internal and external corners of cove base.

3.06. PATCHING/FILLING (where required) A. Mix the PUR-Guard HD-T Resin, HD-Filler, and necessary aggregate (if required) in the proportions recommended by the flooring system manufacturer. B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to fill areas as needed.

3.07. TOPPING / BASE COAT A. The entire mixed batch should be poured and spread at once, do not let material set in pail. B. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 3/16”. Lightly trowel to a uniform thickness of 3/16” as necessary. C. Immediately after application, roll with a loop roller available from the flooring system manufacturer to release any trapped air from the topping. D. Broadcast Colored Quartz into the fresh material before it begins to cure. It is important that the aggregate "rains" down, and not be thrown into, the surface. Broadcast Colored Quartz on material surface in quantities to seed it to full rejection. E. Allow the topping to cure. F. Remove excess Colored Quartz by sweeping, “blow-down”, and/or vacuum prior to next step.

3.08. TOPCOATS A. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9", or 18" wide, 3/8" – 1/2" thick-napped, solvent-resistant paint roller to roll out the material to form a uniform, continuous film. Use a paint brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10 -15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations. 1. Apply two coats of MAC-925 Sealer. B. If required to achieve texture approved by Owner in mock-up, broadcast aluminum oxide, glass beads, or other suitable material into the appropriate layer of wet topcoat resin; size and rate as determined by Owner. All broadcast material shall be locked into place with at least one coat of topcoat material. Never allow broadcast material to remain exposed. C. Allow each topcoat and sealer coat, to cure according to flooring system manufacturer prior to application of additional topcoats.

OEMA-2019-145 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.09. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Expected Results: The finished resinous flooring system shall be uniform in color, texture, and appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges. B. All work not acceptable to the Owner as matching the approved mock-up shall be corrected, at no additional cost to Owner.

3.10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean flooring system materials from adjacent surfaces immediately upon contact. Use rags and appropriate solvents to prevent marring, discoloration and change of gloss on finished surfaces. Installer shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort. B. Protect the system from inclusion of dust and other contaminates until cured hard. C. Protect the resinous flooring system from damage and wear during construction operations, as required, using temporary coverings recommended by the flooring system manufacturer. Remove temporary coverings just prior to final inspection. D. Clean the resinous flooring system just prior to final inspection, using materials and procedures suitable to the flooring system manufacturer.

3.11. COATING SCHEDULE A. Primer (if required) shall be PUR-Guard HD-P. Application rate shall be 100 - 130 sq. ft. per gallon. B. Integral cove base shall be MAC-Guard HD-CB with fillers recommended by flooring system manufacturer for products, substrates and conditions. Install for finish thickness to match 3/16” deep zinc cove cap. C. Patching/filling material (where required) shall be PUR-Guard HD-T. D. Topping / base coat slurry shall be PUR-Guard HD-SL (Parts A&B resin) and PUR-Guard SL Filler applied, a rate of 30 - 33 sq. ft. per batch, with a gauge rake set at 3/16" for a 3/16” thick topping/base coat. E. Colored Quartz to be broadcast into the uncured topping, seeding it to full rejection, an approximate rate of 0.5 – 0.75 pounds per sq. ft. F. Topcoat / Sealer shall be MAC-925, first coat applied at the approximate rate of 90 - 100 sq. ft. per gallon for a minimum dry film thickness of 18 mils., and second coat applied at the rate of 100 sq. ft. per gallon for a minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils.

END 096724.

096724-8 RESINOUS FLOORING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 097200 - VINYL WALL COVERING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 2. Sealing of wall surface to receive vinyl wall covering. B. Related Work: Specified In Other Sections: 1. Gypsum board to receive vinyl wall covering...... Section 092116. 2. Elect. Trim removal on surfaces to receive wall covering ...... Elect. Sects.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classifications: Installed wall covering shall meet the following: 1. Flame Spread: Not more than 25. 2. Fuel Contribution: Not more than 15. 3. Smoke development: Not more than 25.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical description and installation instructions for the vinyl wall covering and its installation material. C. Samples: Submit 3 samples, at least 5" x 8", of each type of vinyl wall covering, illustrating the range of color and pattern variation. Submit full book size samples upon request. D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of the vinyl wall covering manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of the installed work. Include name of manufacturer, material brand name, color and texture designation and precautions for the use of cleaning materials and methods that could damage the wall covering. E. Maintenance Supply: Deliver to the site any surplus (but not less than 1 lin. yd.) of each type, color, and pattern of vinyl wall covering installed, taken from the same manufactured sequence as the materials installed.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store vinyl wall covering rolls in an upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40°F.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant minimum temperature of not less than 60°F at areas of installation for at least 72 hours before, and 48 hours after application of materials.

OEMA-2019-145 VINYL WALL COVERING 097200-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Complying with Fed. Spec. CCC-W-408, Type II (Medium Duty), with minimum vinyl coating (less fabric) of 7 oz./sq. yd., manufactured product as noted on drawings. 1. In All Climate Zones: Vinyl wall covering for installation on exterior walls shall be micro- vented. 2. In Florida and Coastal Climates: All vinyl wall covering shall be micro-vented. B. Primer/Sealer: Primer/sealer with sizing that is intended for use under wallcovering, is VOC compliant and has a vapor permeance of at least 10 grains. Sherwin Williams Multi-Purpose Interior/Exterior Latex Primer/Sealer, B51-450 Series or Architect approved comparable product. C. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended strippable, mildew-resistant, breathable and non-staining adhesive manufactured expressly for applying the selected vinyl wall covering to primed gypsum wallboard.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the vinyl wall covering is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Install materials only when humidity conditions approximate the interior conditions that will exist when the building is occupied. C. Do not proceed with application until surface fixtures and trim, such as electrical outlet and switch plates, escutcheons, wall stops for doors, etc, have been removed by workmen of the appropriate trade. D. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. PREPARATION A. Unpackage the vinyl wall covering materials and allow it to acclimatize to the area of installation 24 hours before application. B. Apply primer/sealer evenly all across surfaces to be covered with vinyl wall fabric. Do not allow primer/sealer onto adjacent surfaces; mask as appropriate and clean-up spatter, etc. as work progresses.

3.03. INSTALLATION A. Place fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with adhesive uniformly spread all across back of fabric. Unless otherwise directed, place wall covering panels consecutively in the order they are cut from rolls, including panels above and/or below wall openings. Hang by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. B. Install vinyl wall covering from ceiling line to 1/2" below top of trim at base of the installation. Keep intersection with ceiling line straight, level and neat. C. Seams: Install seams vertically and plumb, and at least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. Overlap seams and double-cut to assure tight closure. D. Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match. Cut wall covering evenly to the edges of wall penetrations. E. Roll, brush, or use a broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects. Install vinyl wall covering with an intimate bond to the substrate, smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps and overlaps.

097200-2 VINYL WALL COVERING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.04. CLEANUP A. Remove excess adhesive along finished seams before it dries, using warm water and a clean sponge; and wipe dry. B. Verify that cut edges of wall covering are completely concealed; repair any places where edges are not completely concealed. C. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation and leave areas of work in a neat, clean condition.

END 097200.

OEMA-2019-145 VINYL WALL COVERING 097200-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES SECTION 099000 - PAINTING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Surface preparation and painting of all interior exposed items and surfaces: a. that are unfinished or shop primed. b. that are indicated to be painted. 2. Surface preparation and painting of all exterior exposed items and surfaces: a. that are unfinished or shop primed. b. that are indicated to be painted. c. including, but not limited to, hollow metal doors and frames, handrails, cedar boards, and concrete light post base. 3. Touching up with sealant any dents, cracks or voids visible after application of primer. 4. Protection of surfaces not scheduled for painting; cleanup of paint spatters; protection of newly painted surfaces. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Shop priming & touch up in the field ...... Various Sects. 2. Wood trim and cedar gate boards ...... Section 062000. 3. Removal of hardware trim for painting ...... Section 062000. 4. Hollow metal doors & frames...... Section 081113. 5. Gypsum board surfaces...... Section 092116. 6. Removal of electrical items prior to painted...... Elect. Sects.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide finish coats that are compatible with shop primers. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. B. Primers and undercoat paints shall be produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. C. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed for execution of painting work. D. Use paint materials only as directed by the manufacturer’s label on container. E. Definitions and Terminology: The terms and definitions in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. F. Comply with Federal and State Regulations regarding VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) levels.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: Submit all products to be used. List each material and cross-reference it to the specified paint and finish system and application. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification. C. Color Samples: When so requested, submit samples on portions of the work at the site, not less than 4ft x 4ft size. D. Maintenance Supply: Deliver to Owner in unused quart containers 1 quart of each type and color of paint used on the Project. Mark each container with color and room names/exterior surfaces where paint was used, without obscuring manufacturer’s label.

OEMA-2019-145 PAINTING 099000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All paints, varnishes, enamels, stains, paste fillers and similar materials must be delivered in their original containers, with the seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Except as otherwise allowed by paint manufacturer’s written instructions, maintain temperature in storage areas between 50°F and 90°F.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply paint when the surface is damp, the room humidity exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendations, or, for exterior paints, during rainy or frosty weather. B. Protection: Protect painted work at all times and protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of painting work. C. Remove oily rags, waste, etc., from the building at the end of each day’s work and take every precaution to avoid the danger of fire. Keep oily rags, etc. susceptible to spontaneous ignition, in water filled metal cans with tight lids or in FMRC-approved containers.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS A. Approved Manufacturers: Paint materials shall be manufactured by Sherwin-Williams (basis of design), PPG, or Benjamin Moore unless another manufacturer is specifically named. B. Products: Manufacturer’s products listed hereinafter in the Painting Schedule represent types and grades required. Comparable products of other manufacturers listed in preceding paragraph will also be acceptable unless noted otherwise. C. Grades: Materials not displaying the manufacturer’s identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable. D. Caulk: Paintable acrylic-latex sealant with 12-1/2% elongation.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Applicator must examine the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be done and shall notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats. C. Do not apply coatings to surfaces where electronic moisture meter indicates values above 12%. D. Do not proceed with painting work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator’s acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within that particular area. E. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed or crumbly surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a smooth, durable paint film, until those surfaces have been prepared as specified below. F. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by Owner’s representative before application of succeeding specified coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be given and the work in question shall be recoated.

3.02. SURFACE PREPARATION A. General:

099000-2 PAINTING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Just before painting is started, clean all surfaces to be painted until free of substances that could impair bond of paints, including loose dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers or existing coats and reprime substrate with compatible primer or apply tie in coat as required to produce paint system indicated. 2. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 3. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. B. Gypsum Board: Fill holes, nail holes, cracks, etc., after the first coat, with filler of a color to match that of the finish. Filler shall be brought flush with the adjoining surface, free of ridges and depressions. C. Steel: Where rust or scale is present, wire brush, or sand clean before painting. Clean steel to SSPC level recommended by paint manufacturer. Shop coats of paint that are marred shall be cleaned and touched up with compatible primer. D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Thoroughly clean galvanized steel to remove grease, oil residue, dirt, flux and other foreign matter by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Comply with requirements of manufacturer of paint system to be applied to finish surfaces unless more stringent requirements are specified herein. E. Cedar: 1. Remove pencil marks and other blemishes that will show through finish. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Finish edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of cedar boards prior to installation. 4. Prior to stain application, perform water test per manufacturer’s recommendation in inconspicuous location. Do not apply stain until cedar absorbs water as necessary to indicate its ability to absorb stain. F. Concrete: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second coat. G. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second coat. H. Wood Substrates for Transparent Finish: 1. Remove pencil marks and other blemishes that will show through coatings. Seal pitch leaks with a sealer recommended by stain manufacturer and then fill nail holes with tinted filler after sealer has been applied. I. Powder Coated Surfaces to be Painted: Provide surface profile on all powder coated surfaces to be painted according to SSPC SP-2 to promote paint adhesion. J. Mildew and Mold: Remove with solution of detergent and tri-sodium phosphate or solution of detergent and bleach; and then rinse clean. K. Caulking Touch-Up: After application of primer, fill-in with paintable caulk any dents, cracks and voids that appear, and make smooth. 1. Fill cracks between dissimilar materials such as between hollow metal doorframes and walls. 2. Seal top surfaces of exterior steel doors and wipe away excess sealant.

3.03. APPLICATION A. General: 1. Paint all exposed surfaces except where specified or noted as a surface not to be painted.

OEMA-2019-145 PAINTING 099000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas, unless directed otherwise. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 4. Apply material only to dry, properly prepared surfaces. 5. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 6. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, establishing a total dry film thickness for each coat as recommended by coating manufacturer. 7. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Give special attention to ensure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that on flat surfaces. 8. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coat. Doubling-back to establish additional coats shall not be allowed. 9. Tint undercoats to a shade slightly lighter than that of the succeeding coat. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. B. Steel Doors: 1. Before finishing exterior hollow metal doors, apply sealant to seams in tops of doors and wipe off excess. 2. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors, same as faces of doors. 3. Paint bottom channel of exterior hollow metal doors before they are hung. C. Concrete Block Masonry: Do not apply block fillers until block installation has dried for at least 30 days. D. Cedar Gate Boards: Apply finish to all surfaces of cedar gate boards prior to attachment to gate frame so all surfaces are equally sealed against moisture. Touch up finish as necessary after installation of boards. E. Concrete: Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second coat. F. Downspouts Indicated to be Painted: Finish visible portions of interior of downspout to match exterior.

3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.05. PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP A. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. B. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots from the floors, glass and other surfaces. D. Remove from the premises as the work progresses all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature caused by work of this Section.

099000-4 PAINTING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3.06. PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Paint all exposed interior surfaces except where the material is specifically noted below as a surface not to be painted. Do not paint items such as, but not limited to: 1. Factory finished items, unless Owner indicates item is to be painted to match adjacent surfaces. 2. Finished Metal Surfaces: Bright or satin polished aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze. 3. Operating Parts: Valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts. 4. Labels: Code-required labels such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) labels, as well as equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. B. Number of Coats Required: The number of coats listed in the following schedule is to be taken as a minimum. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. C. Paint specification is based upon Sherwin-Williams (S-W) products. Comparable products of other manufacturers, listed as approved, may be used unless noted otherwise. D. Exterior Surfaces: 1. Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames and Powder Coat Primed Handrails: 1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50. 2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series. 2. Galvanized Metal: 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 3. Aluminum Downspouts: 1 coat - S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 4. Ferrous Metal (including gas piping painted safety yellow per code): 1 coat – S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2 coats -S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 5. Wood Fence Supports / Exposed Plywood: 1 coat – S-W Exterior Oil-Based Wood Primer, Y24W8020. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 6. Concrete block: 1 coat – S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200, minimum 8 mils DFT/coat applied for pinhole free finish. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 7. Cedar Gate Boards: 2 coats - S-W WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain, A15T5 Series. 8. Concrete Light Base: 1 coat – S-W Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer / Sealer, A24W8300. 2 coats -S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. E. Interior Surfaces: See Drawings 1. Gypsum Board Walls, Ceilings & Bulkheads: 1 coat - S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer. 2 coats - S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600 Series.

OEMA-2019-145 PAINTING 099000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO Note: In climate zones 1 through 4 the vapor permeance of this paint system shall not be less than 1.0. 2. Wood Trim & Millwork: 2 coats - S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Gloss, A68 Series. 1 coat - S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Satin, A68 Series. 3. Ferrous Metal: Shop prime coat, field touch-up. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series. 4. Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames: 1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50. 2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series.

END 099000.

099000-6 PAINTING OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES SECTION 102112 – PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Floor supported overhead braced plastic partitions configured as toilet enclosures. 2. Hardware and accessories specified herein and as necessary for complete installation. 3. Installation of toilet accessories specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4. Installation of toilet accessories furnished by Owner. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Attachment blocking and framing ...... Section 061000. 2. Ceramic tile floors and walls ...... Section 093013. C. Related Items Supplied by Owner: Toilet accessories as indicated on Drawings.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings and other components. C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of anchorages, hardware and reinforcements for attachment of toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show overhead bracing locations. D. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. E. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver toilet compartments wrapped in manufacturer’s original packaging. Remove any wet wrappings and inspect for damage. Protect from damage, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Store in dry, enclosed building in manner recommended by compartment manufacturer to protect against warping or other damage. Protect from excessive heat.

1.05. COORDINATION A. Coordination: Do not begin installation until:

OEMA-2019-145 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102112-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Wall finishes are completed and have cured. 2. Floor finishes are completed, cured and are approved for traffic.

1.06. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Breaking of any component. b. Corrosion of any component. c. Separation or delamination of finish from substrate. d. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 48-inch section. 2. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements for Toilet Compartments Designated as Accessible: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA- ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 and the Accessibility Code for the state in which the project resides.

2.02. SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Manufacturer: Accurate Partitions Corporation. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced floor anchored. C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. Provide manufacturer’s standard pebble grained texture. 1. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 2. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated on drawings. 3. Partition and Door Height: Partitions and doors shall be 55” high and mounted with bottom 14” above finish floor. 4. Door Width: Provide 36” wide, out swinging doors with a minimum 32” wide clear opening. 5. Door Swings: As indicated on Drawings. D. Pilaster Mounting and Shoes: Partitions shall be anchored to floor by stainless steel mounting bar attached to bottom of pilaster. Mounting bar shall be anchored to floor with corrosion resistant bolts. Floor anchoring system shall be concealed by manufacturer's standard one piece slip-on type shoe of minimum 20 gauge stainless steel with #4 finish. 1. Pilasters adjacent to walls and less than 2-1/2 inches wide shall be designed so doors will be even with the bottom of the pilasters, without protruding hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings) for Panels:

102112-2 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. Each bracket shall have a minimum of six (6) through bolt panel attachments.

2.03. HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at all compartments. 3. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors that swing against toilet compartments. Mount on door. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch thick stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts. C. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Torx drive without center pin not allowed. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless- steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 1. Anchors into walls shall be capable of developing FULL strength of brackets without pulling out from wall. 2. No plastic expansion anchors allowed.

2.04. MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584. D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. F. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.05. FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

OEMA-2019-145 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102112-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation, including overhead braces. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. No evidence of drilling, cutting or patching shall be visible in the finished work. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 3/4 inch. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with brackets the full height of the panel. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. c. Pilasters adjacent to walls and less than 2-1/2 inches wide shall be anchored to wall (not at floor) and overhead brace. d. Anchor only to solid wood blocking. No plastic expansion anchors allowed. 3. Set doors with uniform clearance at strike pilaster, not to exceed 3/16 inch top to bottom when latched. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Accessories: Install partition mounted accessories specified on Drawings and furnished by Owner, drilling and cutting holes in partitions as required. Locate as indicated on Drawings, reviewed shop drawings and as required by accessibility codes. 1. Coat Hook Bumper: a. Install one on the stall side of each door, centered in door, at height approved on Shop Drawings. b. At accessible stall, hook shall be at 48” above finish floor, unless noted otherwise.

3.03. ADJUSTMENT, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Just prior to final inspection, adjust partition assembly and adjust and lubricate door hardware, according to manufacturer’s written instructions, so that doors swing freely while maintaining 3/16" maximum clearance from pilasters. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. B. Protect units after erection so that there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance. Replace damaged work as directed. C. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, including any marks made on walls and partitions to establish alignment.

102112-4 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO D. Repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the Owner, damage to compartment components, using materials and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer. E. Installer of the toilet partitions shall be responsible for repair or replacement of floor and/or wall finishes damaged due to his work. Repair or replacement shall be performed by the contractors who installed the finishes, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repairing or replacement of finishes shall be done without additional charge to the Owner.

END 102112

OEMA-2019-145 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102112-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES SECTION 104400 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Gypsum board openings and framing...... Section 092116.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Fire extinguishers shall comply with and be located in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Architectural (ADA) Guidelines and the Accessibility Code of the state in which the Project resides. 2. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Certifications: Fire extinguishers shall be delivered with certification denoting that they have been inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector within the previous 30 days. C. Coordination: Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguisher indicated are accommodated.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of unit specified. Indicate rough opening sizes, anchorages, hardware and accessory items. C. Samples: Submit samples of lettering for cabinet front and signage. Indicate text, letter style, size, color and location.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Acceptable Models & Manufacturers: 1. FEC-1: a. Architectural Series Model No. 2409-6R (Non-Rated) by Larsen’s Manufacturing. b. Ambassador Model No. 1017 (Non-Rated) by J. L. Industries. B. Cabinet Construction: 1. Cabinet Box: Cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish (white color) inside and outside. Inside dimensions approximately 9-1/2"W x 24"H x 6"D. 2. Hinges: Recessed or continuous. 3. Door: Steel panel with full-height, vertical, duo type frame with clear tempered float glass, baked enamel finish, white color.

OEMA-2019-145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES 104400-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Door Handle: Applied type, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s options, including factory finish. a. Provide recessed pull where required to comply with Americans with Disabilities Architectural (ADA) Guidelines. 5. Door Frame: Rolled edge trim design, of steel, factory baked enamel, white color. 6. Identification: Cabinet shall bear the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” written vertically, with upright letters stacked on top of each other, on metal part of door panel in manufacturer’s standard typeface selected by Architect. Words shall be in red letters. C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel bracket, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated finish. 1. Identification: With lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location, provide signage identifying bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals, applied to mounting surface. Architect to determine orientation of lettering.

2.02. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Types: 1. For FE-1: (mounted on bracket in non-cooking areas and in fire extinguisher cabinet in dining area) a. 10 lbs capacity, multi-purpose dry chemical type for A/B/C Class fires, U.L. listed, fully pressurized, with sight gauge, factory charged: 1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: MP10 Series, UL4A-80B:C. 2) J. L. Industries: Cosmic 10E, UL4A-80B:C. 2. For FE-2 (mounted on bracket in cooking areas): a. Wet chemical, 6 liter capacity, type for K Class fire, U.L. listed, fully pressurized, with sight gauge, factory charged. 1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: WC-6L (K Class). 2) J. L. Industries: Saturn 15, Class K, UL Rating K. b. Placard: Include rigid, permanent sign for mounting next to type FE-2 fire extinguisher stating that extinguisher shall not be used until fire suppression system has been activated. Comply with requirements of NFPA 10. B. Serviceability Inspection: Within 30 days prior to delivery to site, each fire extinguisher shall have been inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector and shall bear the inspector’s current tag or equivalent mark upon delivery. C. Quantities: Furnish 1 fire extinguisher for each fire extinguisher cabinet.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION A. General: Install units in accordance with details on Drawings and recommendation of manufacturer. B. Mounting Heights: Locate top of cabinet as shown on Drawings or as otherwise required by accessibility code standards listed above.

END 104400.

104400-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS SECTION 124813 - RECESSED FLOOR MATS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Recessed mats at entryways 2. Frames for recessed mats. B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete slab-on-grade...... Section 033000. 2. Ceramic tile surrounding mat frame...... Section 093013.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Recessed entrance mats and accessories for the entire project shall be from one source and by one manufacturer. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors, and application of entrance mats. C. Provide colors of materials for entrance mats as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full complement of colors and patterns. D. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. E. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set on concrete for the installation of the units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals per requirements of Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Samples: Submit 3 sets of samples for each type and color of entrance mat, frames and accessories required. Provide 12" square samples of mat materials and 12" lengths of frame members.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet/Aluminum Recessed Floor Mat System: 1. Construction Specialties. 2. Reese Enterprises. 3. Pawling Corporation.

2.02. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Carpet Floor Mat: Heavy-Duty nylon bonded to backing; size as noted in drawings; recessed mounted tread; aluminum rails; extruded aluminum frame; mill finish; carpet color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full compliment of colors. 1. Pedimat Model-AA-M2 with aluminum level base frame, manufactured by Construction Specialties.

OEMA-2019-145 RECESSED FLOOR MATS 124813-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Perfec Mat, Aluminum Hinge with Frame Model 548, manufactured by Reese Enterprises. 3. Rol-Dek Model EM-800 Aluminum Hinge and SSF-125 Frame manufactured by Pawling Corporation. B. Mat frames: Manufacturer's standard design, fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum, for permanent recess installation on concrete subfloor. Furnish complete with corner pins or reinforcing, and installation anchorages. Provide style to suit the mat type and adjacent finish flooring material. Coat surfaces of frames, which will contact concrete, with zinc chromate paint or manufacturer's standard protective coating.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Installer must examine the substrates and conditions under which the entrance mats and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION A. Verify location of mat and set frame on concrete slab-on-grade where shown on drawings. B. Place mats in mat frames after the surround ceramic tile abutting the frame has been installed and receiving final cleaning.

END 124813.

124813-2 RECESSED FLOOR MATS OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING

1. GENERAL

A. Scope of Work

1. The true intent of the project is to provide for the construction, execution, and completion in every detail of a complete work or improvement which the contractor undertakes to do in full compliance with the plans, specifications, special provisions in accordance with recognized engineering principles. The contractor shall perform all items of work covered and stipulated herewith in accordance with the lines, grades, typical sections, and dimensions given and shall furnish all material, implements, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, electric power and labor necessary to the prosecution and completion of the work.

2. The contractor shall at all times keep the site of the work, including all private or public property involved in or adjacent to the work free from any rubbish, surplus or waste materials that have been deposited by his employees or which have accumulated as a result of the work.

3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to acquaint himself with the location of all underground structures which may be encountered or which may be affected by the work.

4. All fees and charges assessed by water and sewer utilities shall be paid by the General Contractor.

5. It is the intent of the Engineer/Architect to indicate on the plans the existing sewers, water and gas mains, electric and telephone cables and other subsurface structures to the extent that records of these substructures are available. However, if any plans are different in location or elevation from those shown on the plans, the Engineer/Architect shall not be liable for any extra expense involved due to such omissions or changed location except where actual interference of subsurface structures with the location of the proposed sewers necessitates a change in the sewer plans which will entail extra expense. This extra expense will not be paid for unless the contractor has received an extra work order for doing the work.

6. Provide an as-built drawing showing location (with dimensions) and depth of all underground and concealed pipe. As-built drawing shall be kept at job site office until project is complete. At such time it shall be given to the Owner.

B. Any and/or all of the following documents that are applicable are to be considered to be part of the specifications for this contract.

1. Applicable plumbing code.

2. Authority having jurisdiction’s requirements.

2. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Interior Services 1. General

a. Keep pipe clean and free of backfill and other construction materials. Cap or

OEMA-2019-145 PLUMBING 220000-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO seal ends of all lines until construction is complete.

b. Water lines shall be pressure tested and approved by the Engineer/Architect and/or local inspector prior to backfilling. Provide written record of time and result of test.

c. Pipe sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through new masonry or concrete walls or floors.

d. Coordinate the location of sleeves, openings, chases, furred spaces, etc., with the other contractors. Provide all sleeves, hangers, and inserts that are to be built into the structure during the progress of construction.

e. Pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe and shall extend completely through the construction.

f. Sleeves for pipe 4" and smaller shall be at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through. Sleeves for pipe larger than 4" shall be at least 1 pipe size larger than pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be 1" larger in diameter than the insulated pipe.

g. Sleeves shall extend 3/8" above the finish floor. In mechanical rooms and other areas where water may accumulate, sleeves shall extend 2" above the finish floor.

h. Grout openings through concrete or masonry, including space between sleeves and walls or floors, with Dow 8640 or 8641 sealant.

i. Pack annular space between sleeves and insulation or pipe or ductwork with fiberglass.

j. Provide offset and transition fittings as required.

2. Openings in Fire-Rated Construction: Penetration of required fire-resistive rated floor, wall, ceiling and roof assemblies by plumbing components shall be in accordance with one of the following:

a. A device or system tested and listed by an approved testing laboratory. b. Assemblies detailed in Gypsum Association Manual GA-600. c. An approved method of calculation in lieu of approved test.

3. Water Piping

a. Copper tube above ground: Type "L", hard temper, ASTM B42 and B88. Wrought copper sweat fittings and non-corrosive, lead-free, tin antimony solder.

b. Copper tube underground: Type "K" soft ASTM B42 and B88 with silver soldered.

c. Valves - NIBCO bronze ball, or equal.

d. Connect all water lines to each fixture and install all required piping as shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon at pipe penetrations.

e. Test water piping before connecting fixtures with hydrostatic pressure of

220000-2 PLUMBING OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 100 psi without loss of pressure for at least 2 hours (interior). Comply with local ordinances. Provide the Engineer/Architect with results of test.

f. Disinfection - Provide chlorine disinfection. Other approved disinfection methods may be used with prior approval of the Engineer/Architect and local authorities.

g. Water supply risers shall terminate with an air chamber where required. Water supply pipes serving fixtures and equipment shall terminate with an air chamber where required.

h. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections where joining dissimilar metals. i. Underslab connections are prohibited. j. Provide access panels where valves are not exposed.

k. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment.

l. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves.

4. Hot Water Return Piping and Filtered Water

a. PEX (Engel) tubing, fittings and additional components as required. PEX tubing uses a process called the Engel Method to change high density polyethylene to cross-linked polyethylene (PEX). Engel Method PEX is cross-linked during the manufacturing process using heat and high pressure. The result is an extremely uniform product with high temperature, pressure and chemical resistance.

b. PEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/ASTM F877 as certified by Hauser Laboratories and NSF International.

c. PEX tubing carries the following maximum pressure/ temperature ratings: - 160 psi at 73.4oF. - 100 psi at 180oF. - 80 psi at 200oF.

d. Cold expansion brass fittings with PEX reinforced rings to be manufactured to ASTM 1960 and have third party listing.

e. The PEX tubing system must meet all of the following requirements:

1) Approval for the installation of the PEX system must be obtained from the proper administrative authority prior to installation.

2) The system must be installed by a plumber trained by the manufacturer of the particular PEX system to be installed.

3) All components must be part of one specific PEX manufacturer’s system, and must bear the identification mark of that manufacturer. The PEX system must have IAPMO and NSF approval and marking of IAPMO approval must be stamped on tubing and fittings.

4) The installation must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

OEMA-2019-145 PLUMBING 220000-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 5. Pipe Insulation

a. Preformed closed cell - Rubatex R-180-FS insulation, or equal. 3/4" wall thickness (R 3.6 minimum) on hot water supply and hot water return above and below floor slab. 1/2" wall thickness (R 1.9 minimum) on cold water supply above floor slab.

b. Water and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated as follows:

1) Open vanities shall be Truebro, Inc. "Handi Basin-Guard" undersink enclosure or 1/2" oak plywood stained to match cabinets. 2) Wall mounted lavatories shall be fully molded. a) Truebro, Inc. "HandiLav-Guard" Insulation Kit, Model #102 or #103 (for offset traps) in white. b) Brocar Products, "Trap Wrap" Kit #500R or #500HS (for offset traps). c) c) McGuire Products, "Pro Wrap" Kit #PW2000 or PW2000WC (for offset traps) for supply and waste lines.

c. Roof Drain Bodies and Horizontal Rainwater Conductors – 1” thick mineral fiber, foil and paper field-applied jacket, and vapor retarder.

d. Seal ends and joints of insulation with approved joint compound.

6. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping

a. PVC above ground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891. b. PVC underground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891.

c. Connect all soil, waste and vent lines to each fixture and install all required piping as shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon at pipe penetrations.

d. Grade all soil and waste horizontal lines with a minimum of 1/8" per foot. All vent pipe shall be sloped for complete drainage by gravity to soil or waste pipes.

e. Water test drainage system with a minimum of 10' head for 2 hours without loss of water.

f. All soil and vent pipes passing through roof shall be provided with sheet lead weighing not less than 4 lbs. per square foot or other approved frostproof vent terminals.

g. When running a sewer under a footing, disturb as little of the soil under the footings as possible. Provide concrete fill under all footings where excavations wider than 18" are required.

7. PVC Storm Piping: ASTM designations D1785, D2665, D3034 and F891.

8. PVC Soda Line Conduit:

a. ASTM D1785, D2665, F891. b. Pressure test to be watertight. 3. EXECUTION

220000-4 PLUMBING OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO A. Piping arrangements shown are to express general design intent. Alternate arrangements will be considered provided they meet all applicable codes and contractor obtains approval of proposed revisions. B. Structural members whose strength is impaired by improper cutting, drilling or excessive defects shall be replaced or reinforced in a manner acceptable to the Engineer/Architect.

1. Studs may be notched 1/4 their depth to receive piping or conduit, or may be drilled a maximum of 1 1/4" in 4" stud or 2" in 6" stud.

2. When plates are cut more than 1/2 their width for piping or ductwork, reinforce with 18 gauge steel straps.

3. No cutting or notching permitted in roof trusses.

END OF SECTION 220000

OEMA-2019-145 PLUMBING 220000-5 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 230000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

1. GENERAL

A. Submit 4 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer/Architect for approval.

B. Forced air heating drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing of ductwork, equipment locations, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Drawings and specifications are intended to represent a complete job. Inclusion in either the specifications or drawings or required by state and local regulations implies inclusion in the required work.

Prior to submitting his bid, bidder shall call attention of the Engineer/Architect to any material or apparatus he believes to be inadequate or to any necessary items or work omitted. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to interpret his own drawings and specifications to insure that the installation conforms to his intent. Failure of the contractor to acquaint himself with existing conditions at the site shall in no way relieve the contractor of the responsibility for making installation in conformance with drawings and specifications without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Scope of Work

Provide complete heating and ventilating system where shown on the drawings as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Rooftop heating and air conditioning units including direct-expansion cooling sections, operating controls and safety controls, fans, motors, compressors, filters, refrigeration piping, controls and related equipment.

2. Air distribution system including supply, return and fresh air ductwork with grilles, diffusers, registers, louvers and related items.

3. Exhaust systems including fans, motors, backdraft dampers and operators, registers, louvers, grilles, controls, grease guards and related items. Exhaust hoods over deep fryers, griddle and dishwasher are furnished and installed by the HVAC contractor.

4. Temperature control systems including thermostats, time clocks, wiring and relays, dampers and operators and related items.

5. Ductwork insulation including thermal and acoustical and related items.

6. Testing and balancing of air delivery systems. D. Codes, Permits and Inspection Fees

1. All work and materials shall conform in every respect to the current rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, National and State Electrical Codes, Local Codes and Ordinances, Local Utility Regulations and OSHA. Use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel familiar with equipment required and manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation.

2. Give to the proper authorities all required notices relating to the project, obtain all

OEMA-2019-145 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO official permits and licenses required, pay all fees incidental thereto, deliver upon completion of the work and without cost to the Owner all required certificates of inspection and approval.

E. Intent

1. Make the Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between the drawings and/or existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

2. It is the intent of these specifications that the contractor shall provide all the necessary material, apparatus and devices to complete the installation as specified herein, except such parts as are specifically excepted. If any item is either shown on the drawings or called for in these specifications, it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

3. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect and shall be subject to his inspection test and approval at all times from commencement until the acceptance of completed work.

4. Manufacturers shall be responsible for providing material listed by UL or other approved agencies, and all governing codes and ordinances. All material must bear UL and/or other approved labels where possible. Items specified by catalog number or brand name and approval of shop drawings will not relieve the manufacturer of this responsibility.

F. Manual

1. Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Engineer/ Architect, 4 bound copies of an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of Special Conditions, Article 19 of these specifications.

Include with each manual:

a. Copy of the approved Record Documents for this portion of the work. b. Copies of all warranties and guarantees. 2. MATERIALS

A. Roof Top Air Handling Units

1. Fully assembled and wired single zone gas heating and electric cooling of the size and capacity shown on the drawings. Units shall be AGA certified and ARI rated. All units shall be by the same manufacturer.

Accepted Manufacturers: Lennox Energence Series..

2. Compressor: Welded, fully hermetic compressor with vibration isolation. Motor/compressor units shall be warranted for 5 years (non-pro-rated). Safety Controls: Low pressure, motor overload, crankcase heaters, freezestat and lockout circuit for restart.

3. Casing and Frame: Welded construction constructed of galvanized steel bonderized and coated with baked enamel finish. Units shall be suitable for rooftop mounting, weatherproof, insulated casing and curb.

4. Coils: Indoor coils are direct-expansion type, non-ferrous construction with aluminum fins and copper tube. Outdoor coils are aluminum finish and aluminum tubes.

230000-2 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 5. Fans and Motors: Indoor supply fan shall be double inlet forward-curved centrifugal fan with direct-drive or belt-drive motor. Outdoor fan shall be propeller type, direct-drive motor for vertical discharge.

6. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel construction, sectionalized design. Burners shall be slotted-port type, stainless steel, natural draft venting. 10 year warranty on heat exchanger.

7. Controls: Furnish AGA approved gas controls to meet state and local codes. All operating and safety controls required are to be supplied by equipment manufacturer, including programmable heat/cool thermostat for automatic changeover. Gas train to include gas valve for main burner, redundant safety gas valve, intermittent spark ignition system and high temperature. Limit switch.

8. Accessories:

a. Roof curb - field installed.

b. Integrated enthalpy economizer with hood – factory installed. c. Throwaway filters during construction - field installed. 9. Smoke Detector: Provide factory installed in-duct smoke detector.

B. Thermostats: Single zone programmable commercial thermostats - 7 day programming with multiple occupied/unoccupied periods per day and a 3 hour override, ventilation and fan control, 2 stage heating and 2 stage cooling - Honeywell T7350 or equal.

C. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan: Centrifugal, belt or direct driven as per schedule on drawings, aluminum construction with centrifugal blower fan and spun inlet venture. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Drive assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolator. Drive assembly and wheel shall be removable without dismantling unit. Unit shall be AMCA certified.

D. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Fans shall have centrifugal blower, inlet grille and gravity backdraft damper. Fan shall be AMCA certified with a sound rating of 4.5 sones or less. Housing shall be insulated with 1/2" acoustic insulation.

E. Roof Top Air Handling Units Control:

1. Occupied Cycle: Supply fan will run continuous with fresh air damper open to minimum position. Gas burner shall be activated upon heat demand. Cooling demand will activate first stage economizer control with second and third cooling stages sequenced with economizer operation.

2. Unoccupied Cycle: Outside air damper will close. Fan will cycle with demand for cooling or heating with burner control.

F. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers:

1. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction in which they are installed. Review architectural schedules for compliance. Coordinate locations with reflected ceiling plan. G. Natural Gas Fuel System:

1. Gas piping - 2" and Smaller

a. ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (Schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings.

OEMA-2019-145 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

b. ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings.

2. Unions and Flanges - 2" and Smaller

ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for fittings of respective piping service but not less than 250 PSI.

3. Gas Valves

a. Crane, Walworth, Jenkins, Nibco, Milwaukee or Southern Manufacturing Company are acceptable manufacturers.

b. 1/2" to 4": Southern Manufacturing Company Fig. 425 gas valve, cast iron body, screwed or flanged ends, bronze bearings, bronze plug and resilient seal ring for drop tight shutoff to 175 PSIG working pressure.

4. Gas Pressure Regulators

a. Fisher or Kunkle are acceptable manufacturers.

b. Regulators shall reduce pressure as noted on the plans.

c. 3/4" to 1-1/4": Fisher HSR direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator. d. 1-1/2" to 2": Fisher CS400 direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator.. 5. Service

a. Contractor shall arrange for the local gas utility to install a new gas meter, sized to deliver 2 psig natural gas (quantity shown on the drawings) at 1,000 BTU per cubic foot heat content.

b. Contractor shall pay for all gas service and meter charges levied by the utility company.

6. Leak Tests

a. Test piping to 100 lbs. pressure for 48 hours with no loss of pressure. Test in accordance with gas utility. Provide the Engineer/Architect with copy of test.

b. Gradually increase pressure to not more than 1/2 of test pressure; then increase pressure in steps of approximately 1/10 of test pressure until required test pressure is reached. Examine joints and connections with soap bubble solution or equivalent method. Piping system shall show no evidence of leaking. 3. EXECUTION

A. Material on Site and Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and storage of material and equipment on site. Any material damaged by rust, corrosion, warping, breakage, finish damage, etc., shall be replaced by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.

B. Cooperation/Coordination

1. The contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with other contractors by

230000-4 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO scheduling and installing his work as the construction progresses. Any deviation from contract plans shall be approved by the Engineer/Architect before proceeding.

2. The contractor is expected to study the plans of other trades and to fit his work into the work of others in a coordinated manner. He shall lay out his work and be responsible for his own measurements. He shall check facilities provided by others which require electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. He shall take such measurements as may be necessary to assure approved fitting and proper installation of his work and all other work depending thereon.

3. The contractor shall cooperate with other contractors to avoid complications between the installation of heating and ventilating equipment and equipment installed by others.

C. Basic Materials

1. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid shall be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others listed, comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.

2. The contractor shall provide materials and equipment of the type for which there are National Board of Fire Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listings or approved equal and label services available.

3. All materials used for the heating and ventilating installation shall be new and unused except as otherwise indicated, and shall be uniform in type and manufacture for the entire installation.

4. All materials shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them in service and shall be the latest standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers.

D. Approval of Substitutions

1. It is the intent that the heating and ventilating contractor shall base his proposal upon furnishing and installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to substitute on manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed and discussed with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless product substituted shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and cost. Further substitutions shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.

E. Guarantee

1. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintance with these specifications and the respective requirements. He guarantees that the heating and ventilating system has been installed strictly in accordance with the heating and ventilating drawings and specifications, using only the best of materials available, installed in a substantial manner by experienced labor.

2. The contractor by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and further make good and acceptable all labor and materials within one year from date of final acceptance.

F. Electrical Work

1. Electrical service to all major equipment will be provided by the electrical contractor. These services will be installed complete with required line wiring, starters and disconnect switches to all pumps, fans, compressors, etc. and to the main control terminals, only of "package" wired equipment.

OEMA-2019-145 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-5 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

2. Low voltage control wiring within such package equipment, and all remote control, sensing and/or interlock wiring including the control and sensing devices (P.E., E.P., float, flow pressure or thermo switches, valve and dampers operators, etc.) is the responsibility of this contractor, except where specifically noted. Line voltage control wiring by the electrical contractor.

3. All starters and disconnects shall be by the electrical contractor except where specifically indicated otherwise. "Package Equipment".

4. All motors shall comply with NEMA, AIEE and ASA requirements. Coil capacitor start.

G. Lubrication

1. Lubricate all mechanical equipment under this contract and adjust before it is placed in operation. Keep equipment lubricated until building is accepted.

2. Do not operate equipment which includes filters without the filters in place. H. Housekeeping and Cleanup

1. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by employees or work, and at completion of work or more often as necessary, remove rubbish from and about the building. At completion, remove tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and leave his work "broom clean" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified.

2. Clean grilles, diffusers and equipment, removing stains, paint, dirt, dust and temporary labels or protections.

3. At no time shall any rubbish be thrown from windows or other parts of the building. See Supplementary General Conditions on use of fires on premises. In case of dispute, Owner may remove rubbish or clean and charge cost to several contracts as Engineer/Architect may determine just.

I. Testing and Adjusting

1. Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to assure proper balance and operation.

a. Test and regulate ventilation and air conditioning systems to conform to the air volumes shown on the approved design drawings +/- 10% in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council procedural standards by an independent TAB contractor. Submit 3 copies of final report for approval.

b. Make tests and adjustments in apparatus and ducts for securing the proper volume and face distribution of air for each grilled and ceiling outlet. Upon completion, permanently mark all equipment settings.

c. Where required, provide pulleys for fans at no additional cost to the Owner, and set to drive the fans at the speed needed to give the indicated volume.

d. Eliminate noise and vibration and assure proper function of all controls, maintenance of temperature, and operation in accordance with the approved design.

END OF SECTION 230000

230000-6 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK

1. GENERAL

A. It must be understood that the heating, ventilating and air conditioning drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing, proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.

B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

2. MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Furnish, install, fit and secure in place all supply, return, exhaust and vent air ducts, risers, branches, etc., as shown and detailed on plans, built of galvanized iron as hereinafter specified.

1. Sheet metal work shall be constructed according to practices recommended in the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st edition 1985" as published by SMACNA, and hereinafter specified. All duct dimensions noted on the drawings are finished inside dimensions. Sheet metal used shall not be lighter than the following:

Rectangular Galvanized Sheet Aluminum Ducts Metal Gage Alloy Up thru 12" 26 .020 13" - 30" 24 .025 31" - 54" 22 .032 55" - 84" 20 .040

Round Galvanized Sheet Ducts Metal Gage Up thru 13" 26 14" - 22" 24

2. Install ducts, risers, etc., as indicated on the drawings, making necessary changes in cross section, offsets, etc., whether or not same is specifically indicated. If ducts cannot be run as shown on the drawings, install ducts between required point, subject to the approval of the Engineer/Architect without additional cost to the Owner.

3. At all outlets and inlets in rooms, flange ducts for attachment of grilles. Install grilles according to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Sheet metal work throughout shall be assembled and erected in such a manner that no vibration will occur and no noise be transmitted by the moving air.

5. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or be a miter turn with turning vanes.

6. All supply take-offs shall be bellmouth or conical type. Square/rectangular take-off fittings shall have 45 degree leading edge for 4" maximum depth. No air turns allowed.

OEMA-2019-145 DUCTWORK 233113-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

7. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant gaskets and tapes, except as noted.

B. Ductwork Pressure - Velocity Classification: Low Pressure, +2" W.G., 2500 FPM maximum, Class "B" seal. All grease ducts shall have welded liquid tight seal.

C. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or a miter turn with turning vanes. Vanes shall be double wall air foil type.

D. Round take-off fittings shall be bellmouth or conical. Rectangular or square take-off fittings shall have a 45 degree lead edge with 4" minimum depth.

E. Volume Dampers: Furnish and install in branches of supply air and exhaust ducts. Substantial volume dampers to be fitted with quadrant locking devices for adjusting the air delivery. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" width.

F. Access Panels: Install access panels with latches and gaskets in ducts at automatic dampers, coils, fire dampers, and other duct mounted equipment. Panels in insulated ducts must be internally insulated.

G. Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers at discharge grille of louvers unless motor operated dampers are specified with these units. Entire perimeter of blade shall be lined with neoprene or vinyl seals to prevent clatter. Damper blades shall be tight closing.

H. Flexible Duct:

1. Provide factory fabricated insulated low pressure flexible duct with zinc-coated spring steel helix, 1" thick fiberglass insulation sheathed in a seamless vapor barrier (RFK) jacket. Maximum length 8'.

2. Composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, meeting Class 1 requirements of flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less as set forth in NFPA Bulletin 90-A, and bearing the UL label as an air duct.

3. Flexible ductwork shall meet ductwork pressure classification. I. Insulation: 1. Materials:

Materials shall conform to NFPA bulletin 90-A as determined by U.L. method NFPA 225 - ASTM E84, complying with applicable codes with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.

2. External Ductwork Insulation:

a. Concealed ductwork (horizontal): Wrap ductwork with flexible type fiberglass insulation, operating temperature range 40 to 250 degrees F., K=0.25, 1-1/2 PCF density, vapor permeability less than 0.02 perms, installed R of 4.5. Johns Manville Microlite EQ Type 100 duct wrap insulation.

b. Concealed ductwork (vertical): Rigid fiberglass duct liner, operating temperature to 250 degrees F., installed R of 6.3. Johns Manville Permacote Linacoustic R- 300.

c. Application Schedule: Thickness Exhaust air ducts 1-1/2" Fresh air ducts 1-1/2"

233113-2 DUCTWORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO Supply air ducts 1-1/2"

J. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ductwork

1. Welded Steel

a. Duct to be constructed with 16 gauge welded black iron.

b. All external joints, seams and duct connections to the hood shall be welded liquid tight conforming to NFPA 90.

c. Insulation: 3M "Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+". K. Air Outlets and Inlets:

1. Furnish grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers in the sizes, type and capacity as shown on the drawings by the selected manufacturer or approved equal.

2. Grilles, registers, diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction in which they are installed. Check architectural schedules for ceiling construction. Coordinate locations with ceiling system and lighting fixtures.

3. EXECUTION

A. Ducts shall be constructed, supported and installed in accordance with the latest standards of SMACNA. Install all turning vanes, access doors, extractors, and accessories as indicated or specified herein.

B. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services and perform all tests necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the completed installation to the approval of the Owner and Engineer/Architect. The air and hydronic systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Procedural Standards, NEBB or equivalent.

END OF SECTION 233113

OEMA-2019-145 DUCTWORK 233113-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 260000 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

1. GENERAL

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, transportation, permits, certificates of inspection as required for the complete electrical installation as specified hereinafter and as shown on the drawings.

B. Prior to submitting his bid, the contractor shall call the attention of the Engineer/Architect to any materials or apparatus he believes inadequate and to any necessary items or work omitted.

C. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

2. CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. All work and materials are to conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriter's, National Electrical Code, OSHA, state and local codes and the local utilities. The contractor shall obtain all permits needed in connection with the work and pay all fees incident thereto including necessary costs to bring distribution to site.

3. DRAWINGS

A. It must be understood that the electrical drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing of conduit run, proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.

B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

C. Upon completion of the job, the Electrical Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a complete set of tracings or a drawing showing size, description and location of electrical materials as actually installed.

4. INTENT

A. This contractor shall furnish and install all the necessary materials, apparatus and devices, to complete the electrical equipment herein as specified, except such parts as are specifically excepted.

B. It is the intent of these specifications and the drawings accompanying same to cause this equipment to be furnished complete in every respect.

C. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

D. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the

OEMA-2019-145 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO Engineer/Architect, and shall be subject to his inspection, test and approval at all times from the commencement until the acceptance of the completed work.

E. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid shall be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others listed, comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.

5. COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS

A. The contractor shall lay out his work and shall be responsible for its correctness. He is to take such measurements from existing work as may be necessary to insure the fitting of his work and all other work depending thereon. Check equipment provided by others which required electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for all circuitry required for all equipment. Items not specifically mentioned in Equipment Connections, shall be the responsibility of the designated subcontractor. Cooperation between the various contractors to accomplish this must exist at all times.

6. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. It is the intent that the Electrical Contractor shall base his proposal upon furnishing and installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to substitute on manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed and discussed with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless product substituted shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and cost. Further substitutions shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Special Conditions.

7. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work and materials shall be in accordance with the following: National Electrical Code, state and local governing codes, state and local fire codes, regulations of the electric utility serving the project, and OSHA regulations, current edition.

The following standards apply as minimum requirements: U.L. standards, NFPA requirements and NEMA standards..

8. INSPECTIONS

Electrical Contractor shall arrange for all required periodic regulatory inspections.

9. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. Lighting

1. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq. ft.

2. Provide and maintain .5 watt/sq. ft. lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes.

3. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

4. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 5. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

B. Power

260000-2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Provide temporary electrical service with distribution equipment within 10 feet of the back of the building within two weeks of start of project.

2. Power service characteristics: 240 volt, 200 ampere, single phase.

3. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required.

4. Provide feeder switch at source distribution equipment.

5. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

10. SERVICE, UTILITIES

A. Coordinate the extensions of electrical, telephone and TV cable services to have services available for orderly progress of work. Pay all permanent connection charges.

B. Contractor shall include all charges for service installations in his bid.

C. Verify service entrance locations with power, cable and telephone companies. Verify number and size of conduit required for conductors prior to bid.

11. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Provide four (4) copies of all submittals.

B. Submittals must include all details, noted in the Contract Documents plus ampacity, rated voltage, cycles, phase, number of poles, maximum fault current and wiring diagrams.

C. All submittal sheets must be marked to indicate the exact equipment and connections required. General submittal sheets, drawings and wiring diagrams not properly marked will be rejected.

D. For all equipment requiring installation or connection by another contractor, furnish one (1) additional set of shop drawings for each contractor making connections to the equipment involved.

E. The following submittals will be required:

1. Service equipment: a. Meter centers b. C/T cabinet if required c. Panel boards d. Associated equipment as required 2. Lighting fixtures and standards 3. Emergency lighting 4. Specialty items

12. CONCLUSION

A. The contractor shall furnish the Owner with two complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions for all items furnished under this contract. Provide in bound sets with complete index tabs. Information must include parts list, equipment warranties and wiring diagrams.

B. The contractor shall provide the Owner with a set of drawings showing the route and depth of the underground services. Conduit routing and pull boxes shall be indicated.

OEMA-2019-145 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 13. GUARANTEE

A. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintances with these specifications and the respective requirements. He guarantees that the electrical system has been installed strictly in accordance with the electrical plans and specifications, using only the best of materials available, installed in a substantial manner by experienced labor.

B. The contractor, by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and further make good and acceptable all labor and materials, except lamps found defective within one year from date of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 260000

260000-4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 260010 - GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS AND SERVICE

1. GENERAL

A. The preferred wholesaler for this project is Crescent Electric Supply Company - contact Chris Crull at (608) 241-2882 (e-mail [email protected]). Culver’s Franchising System has worked out package pricing for electrical equipment. B. Section 260000 and all references therein form a part of this section. C. Coordinate with local utility to provide service entrance. D. By Utility:

1. Primary electric service - 800 amp 3 phase. Verify with utility.

2. Power transformer. Verify with utility.

3. Secondary service conductors, contractor to verify, include in bid if required.

4. Conductor termination fittings and secondary service conductor terminations in customers service equipment, where applicable, contractor to verify, include in bid if required.

E. By Electrical Contractor:

1. Provide conduit(s) and wiring from building electric service equipment underground to the outside of the building where indicated on the drawings as per utility requirements.

2. Trenching from transformer pad to building.

3. Secondary service ground at building.

4. Provide empty conduit(s) for secondary service conductors under walks, drives, parking lots, etc. as required by the utility for lighting, signage.

F. Verify service entrance locations with utility. Verify number and size of conduits required for secondary service conductors.

2. MATERIALS

A. Service Equipment

1. Meter sockets, current transformer cabinets and service terminal boxes shall meet requirements of the power company. 2. Circuit breaker disconnects shall be Square D.

B. Balancing Loads

1. When connecting single phase circuits to a three phase system, distribute the loads among phases to achieve a balanced load on all three phases of the system.

OEMA-2019-145 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

C. Power and Lighting Panels

1. All panel boards shall be Square D, shall have doors, and shall be securely mounted at the locations indicated on the drawings. All other panels shall have stenciled identifying code letters/numbers on the outside of the panel doors and in accordance with the drawings.

2. Circuit breakers shall be common-trip for multi-pole bolt-on.

3. Provide circuit-directory card, typed or neatly black-ink lettered, in each panel board and under clear plastic shield. Identify all circuits.

D. Wiring Devices

1. All conductors shall be copper, except in sizes #3 AWG and larger, equal ampacity aluminum conductors may be used.

2. Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG, unless otherwise noted.

3. Wire #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid with THWN insulation.

4. Wire #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded with THWN insulation.

5. All wiring above the floor will be installed in thin-walled metal conduit.

6. Fixture drops to be metal clad flexible conduit with green ground conductor - maximum length 6'-0".

7. All wiring installed underground or in the floor slab shall be installed in rigid heavy wall galvanized steel conduit or rigid heavy wall PVC.

8. All wiring installed exposed to the elements shall be in rigid heavy wall galvanized steel conduit.

9. Install all emergency lights, exit lights and fire alarm wiring in conduit or raceways. #10 wire minimum wire size for exit and emergency light circuits.

10. Single conductors installed in conduit may be used throughout.

11. Low voltage wiring to be supported at 5'-0" o.c. maximum.

3. EXECUTION

A. Install service and service equipment as shown on the drawings and riser diagrams.

B. Main service equipment located on the inner face of walls shall be mounted on 3/4" weatherproof plywood painted with one coat primer and one coat grey enamel before installation of equipment.

C. Provide system ground for new service as required by Code.

1. Ground all equipment, including switches, transformers, conduit systems, motors and all other apparatus by conduit to cold water main and to independent electrode using Burndy or T & B ground clamps. Use additional ground rods if water service is not metallic or if isolation couplings have been used. 2. Locate ground rods in planters or similar areas which will receive water regularly. Drive to a depth of at least 8 feet. 3. Perform ground tests to assure not more than 5 ohms resistance. Add rods as required. 4. Provide ground conductor to all motor and equipment connections. Conduit grounding

GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-2 OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

alone is not acceptable.

D. Transformers, meters, and primary electric service to property limits by local utility company. Contractor shall coordinate work with power company. Pay any charges to power company required for installation of service including costs necessary to bring service to property.

E. Connections at all switches and receptacles shall be by screw terminal connections - not thru "plug-in" type connections provided on the rear of the devices.

END OF SECTION 260010

OEMA-2019-145 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 265000 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

1. GENERAL

A. Sections 260000 and 260010 and all references therein form a part of this section. B. There shall be furnished:

1. A complete conduit and wire system for power and lighting including underground electric service, metering facilities, panelboards, feeder system for power and lighting as indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 26.

2. Branch circuit wiring, in conduit, for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes and motors.

3. Wiring and connections for equipment.

4. A complete installation of fixtures and lamps, including interior lighting, exit lighting, exterior lighting and building lighting.

5. Emergency lighting as shown on the drawings.

6. Telephone service conduit and terminal back boards.

7. Intercom and voice/data conduit system.

8. Television wiring and conduit system and terminal back board.

9. Remote visible and audible signal to be tied to in-duct smoke detector. (in-duct smoke detector provided with mechanical unit).

10. Wiring system in conduit for equipment and controls, motors and controls provided by plumbing and HVAC contractors which require motor starters and line voltage controls.

11. All other items necessary to complete all systems. C. Equipment Connections

Provide all branch wiring, disconnections, trenching, conduit, etc. as required for all equipment associated with the building, including but not limited to:

1. All food preparation, handling, serving and sanitizing equipment. Provide cord for shake machine. 2. Custard machine and associated compressors. 3. All intercom and voice/data equipment. 4. All refrigeration equipment. 5. All HVAC equipment including exhaust fans, kitchen fan controls, motorized intake dampers, economizer controls, in-duct smoke detector and associated equipment. 6. All motors and starters. 7. All plumbing equipment including water heater controls, circulating pump, water softener, automatic water control valves. 8. Exterior lighting including building, remote directional signs, pole lighting, accent lighting, utility building lighting, main sign, marquee signs, patio bollards. 9. Time clock controls. 10. Emergency lighting.

OEMA-2019-145 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-1 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 11. Laundry units. 12. Telephone system. 13. Refrigerant alarm. 14. Fire suppression system. 15. Television distribution system. 16. Cash registers and associated equipment. 17. Menu board. 18. Speaker post. 19. Photo cell. 20. Ice machine. 21. Smoke detector and remote alarm. 22. Line voltage control wiring. 23. Sprinkler alarm. 24. Panic alarm.

D. Conduit only: Provide trenching, conduit, etc. as required for all equipment associated with the building including but not limited to:

1. Future reader board on main sign. 2. Order verification board. 3. Sensor loop. 4. 200' for cable TV - coordinate location with General Contractor. 5. Future electric ceiling heaters and associated controls.

2. MATERIALS

A. Telephone

1. Provide complete wiring system in conduit as required by telephone company with outlets as shown on the drawings. All wiring shall be in conduit.

2. Telephone jacks shall be flush, single gang boxes with ivory plastic cover plates to match electrical cover plates.

a. Wall mount telephone jack for hanging telephone: Hubbell #NS722I. b. Single gang, two modular jack with wall plate: Hubbell #NS722I.

3. Provide an empty conduit to mechanical room as required by the telephone company, for underground service entrance cables. Coordinate requirements with telephone company.

4. Telephone cable to be CAT-5. B. Television (Cable TV)

1. Provide a complete television wiring distribution system including outlet boxes and cover plates for all outlet boxes.

2. Single gang "F" type with one coaxial connector - Hubbell #NS750I. C. Receptacles 1. Single

a. Dryer: Hubbell #HBL9350, 30 amp., 125/250 volt, flush receptacle with #NP724I wall plate or equal.

b. Kitchen Equipment: Hubbell #GFBFST20I dead front GFI with #RRD201I, 20 amp. 125 volt heavy-duty spec. grade single receptacle.

265000-2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Duplex

a. Interior: Hubbell #5362I, 20 amp., 125 volt hard use duplex outlet.

b. Interior: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR , 20 amp. 125 volt ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle.

c. Exterior Roof: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR, 20 amp., 125 volt, ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1000 recessed in-use cover.

d. Exterior Wall: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR, 20 amp., 125 volt ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1010 die-cast in-use cover.

3. Equipment: Verify receptacle requirements with kitchen equipment supplier. D. Switches 1. Single pole: Hubbell #CSB120I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

2. Single pole-keyed: Hubbell #HBL1221LI, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

3. Three way: Hubbell #CSB320I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

4. Four way: Hubbell #CSB420I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch. E. Device Cover Plates 1. Interior Kitchen: Aluminum or stainless steel.

2. Interior Dining: Ivory. F. Lighting Fixtures

1. The type of fixture to be provided for each outlet is indicated by a letter symbol on the working drawings - these various types are called for in the Lighting Fixtures Schedule.

2. All fluorescent lighting to be equipped with electronic ballasts and energy saving lamps.

3. All incidental materials, fittings, hangers to make the lighting fixture installation complete, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.

G. Lighting Controls

1. Provide photo cell control on all exterior non-switched fixtures.

2. Provide time clock controls for exterior lighting.

3. EXECUTION

A. All trenching where required shall be a minimum of 24" below final site grades. B. Conduit Installation

1. Conduit shall be run concealed in walls of the building. Bend conduit to conform to rock in underground excavated areas, conceal where possible. Buried PVC conduit shall be imbedded in sand as required to protect against damage due to rocks.

OEMA-2019-145 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-3 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. Conduits shall be securely fastened to structure using straps or hangers at intervals not greater than 8' and at closer intervals in areas exposed to public contact. Generally, conduit straps shall be one-hole malleable. Perforated iron hangers or wire will not be approved.

3. Conduit to exterior lights shall be concealed and holes through exterior walls carefully caulked and sealed.

4. Conduit fittings shall be tightly applied to maintain rigidity and good electrical bonding. C. Boxes

1. All electrical boxes shall be standard galvanized or plastic where use permits of a size adequate for the number of wires and splices. Boxes shall be securely mounted, set true and flush with finished surfaces. Race, Appleton and Steel City considered equal.

D. Cutting, Patching and Sleeves

1. Cutting and channeling shall be held to a minimum. Provisions for openings, holes and clearance through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions shall be made in advance of construction of such parts of the building. Sleeves may be either plastic or sheet metal.

2. After conduits are installed in sleeves, openings shall be neatly closed and sealed.

3. Slabs and walls damaged by installation of the electrical work shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer/ Architect by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Painting

1. Wood panels and metal frame works required by this electrical work shall be painted by this contractor. Paint before installation of equipment.

2. Fixture hangers and supports, panel trims and flush junction box covers in place prior to normal routine painting will be painted by others, if not in place at this time, this contractor shall be responsible for painting.

3. This contractor shall be responsible for refinishing factory finishes damaged by rust and/or corrosion or damaged by scratching during storage or installation of same.

F. Wire and Cable Installation

1. No wire or cable shall be installed in any conduit until building is enclosed, watertight and dry. Conduits having water and/or debris in them shall be swabbed out before conductors are installed.

2. Properly install conductors in conduit in such fashion that insulation is not damaged or conductors are overstressed.

3. Splice conductors #10 and smaller with Code approved connectors such as Scotchlok. Use cast-type connectors with set screw for #8 and larger connections. Tape with Scotch #88 plastic type or equal.

4. Identify phases of all panel feeders with colored tape or colored conductors at panel lugs. G. Fixtures and Lamps

265000-4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION OEMA-2019-145 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Light fixtures as shown on the drawings and shall be installed complete with lamps, starters and all other equipment necessary for operation.

2. All fixture wiring shall be concealed unless fixture design prevents concealment; all fixtures must be firmly supported from ceiling suspension of structural system, not from ceiling material.

3. All fixtures and lamps shall be in perfect condition when job is turned over to the Owner, and shall function properly to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Engineer/Architect before approval is given.

4. Lamps in fluorescent fixtures shall be energy saving cool white, G.E., Westinghouse or Sylvania are considered equal. All fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed by the Electrical Contractor for one year.

5. All other lamps shall be 120 volt. Incandescent lamps shall be G.E. inside- frosted unless otherwise specified on the drawings.

H. Light Standards

Provide trenching, conduit and wiring and install exterior lights and light standards as shown on the drawings in accordance with Code requirements. Provide all required concrete foundation work and anchor bolts in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

I. Site Signage

Provide trenching, conduit and wiring for site signage. Signs, bases and installation by others. J. Tests and Demonstrations

1. Before placing electrical system in operation, test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds.

2. Demonstrate proper performance of all connected electrical equipment and systems.

END OF SECTION 265000

OEMA-2019-145 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-5 Culver's Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features: 1. Site clearing. 2. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil. 3. Excavation for footings and foundations. 4. Excavation of trenches for underground utilities within the building. 5. Dewatering of excavations. 6. Rough grading for new slabs on grade. 7. Removal of unsatisfactory material below rough grade and subgrade levels as required. 8. Provision of granular materials from offsite for structural fill as required. 9. Classifying and stockpiling usable excavated material, on site, for re-use. 10. Preparation of subgrades to receive fills. 11. Filling, backfilling and compaction of fills. 12. Finish grading of disturbed site areas. 13. Removal and disposal of excess excavated materials. B. Geotechnical Investigation Report: Comply with recommendations in Geotechnical Investigation Report prepared by Professional Services Industries, Inc. dated February 28, 2020. 1. Soils Engineer shall be on site to evaluate soil conditions and bearing capacity. Soils Engineer shall verify existing or remediated soils achieve adequate conditions required for design indicated on Drawings. 2. The contents of this section are intended as general guidelines meant to supplement the recommendations of the Geotechnical Investigation Report and specific instructions of on-site Soils Engineer. These guidelines (in whole or in part) may conflict with those recommendations or specific instructions, if so, review with Soils Engineer to determine appropriate course of action.

C. Soils Engineer:

1. Soils Engineer shall be on site to evaluate soil conditions and bearing capacity. Soils Engineer shall verify existing or remediated soils achieve adequate conditions required for design indicated on Drawings.

2. The contents of this section are intended as general guidelines meant to supplement the recommendations and specific instructions of on-site Soils Engineer. These guidelines (in whole or in part) may conflict with those recommendations or specific instructions, if so, review with Soils Engineer to determine appropriate course of action. D. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Soil borings...... Section 023213. 2. Foundation perimeter insulation...... Section 072100.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Federal Regulations: Earthwork shall conform to: 1. OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, “Excavations” and its appendices. Any requirements specified below which may appear to conflict with OSHA requirements are to be interpreted as supplements and are not intended to supersede OSHA. B. Lines and Levels:

OEMA-2019-145 EARTHWORK 312000-1 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 1. Contractor shall employ and pay for a licensed Engineer or Surveyor, registered in the state in which the Project resides, to establish all lines and levels required for execution of the Work. 2. The Engineer/Surveyor shall send a certified statement to Owner after work is completed stating that the constructed lines and levels meet all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. C. Soil Testing and Inspection Service: 1. The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing for in-place foundation soils and other soil materials proposed for use in the Work. 2. Costs for the first testing of an area shall be paid for by the Owner. All testing required for checking and correcting faulty work or work to be re-done shall be paid for by the Contractor at his own expense. 3. Services shall include: a. Observation of proofrolling (if any). b. Sieve analysis of material to be used for compacted fill beneath footings/building slabs- on-grade and for fill beneath concrete slabs in exterior areas. c. Tests for maximum dry density of compacted fill materials. d. In-place field dry density tests, a minimum of one for every 2,500 square feet or fraction thereof, of area of each layer of compacted subgrade fill under building slabs, other than drainage fill, as directed by Owner’s Representative. e. In-place field dry density tests, minimum of one per every 50 lineal feet or fraction thereof, per ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938, for each layer of compacted fill under all footings, as directed by Owner’s Representative. f. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, extra in-place field dry density tests to determine the extent of recompaction work required.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.” B. Submit to the Soil Testing Service 50 pound representative samples of each proposed fill material at least 2 days prior to the start of any filling operation. C. The Soil Testing Service shall submit 2 copies of all test reports to Owner’s Representative and Owner. D. The Surveyor/Engineer shall submit to the Owner's Representative 2 copies of his certification that all work has been constructed as indicated and specified.

1.04. JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: The excavation contractor shall visit the site prior to submitting his bid in order to determine the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate and the extent of the site preparation work required. B. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work before starting earthwork operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately as to how to proceed. 3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied or used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Owner's Representative and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been arranged.

312000-2 EARTHWORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 4. Demolish and completely remove from the site underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with local utility companies for shut-off and capping or sealing of services if lines are active. Capped lines shall be so identified at grade. C. Explosives: The use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.05. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Barricade open excavations made as a part of earthwork operations and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from vehicular or foot traffic. C. Protect the bottoms of excavations and soils around and beneath foundations from frost.

1.06. BRACING, SHEETING AND SHORING A. Provide bracing, sheeting and shoring for the sides of excavations as necessary to prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures, utilities, roads and streets, etc. The cost of bracing, sheeting and shoring required shall be deemed to have been included as part of the Contract Sum. B. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the strength and adequacy of all such bracing, sheeting and shoring, and is liable for any damage or injury caused by or resulting from improperly supported soils and structures. He shall, if required, submit fully detailed Shop Drawings for review prior to placement; however, such review shall not diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities in any way. C. The Contractor shall issue any notices to owner of adjoining property that may be required by any pertinent laws or ordinances. Furnish copies of such notices to Owner's Representative. D. If the safety of any adjacent structures, utilities, etc., shall appear to be endangered, take all proper means to support such embankments, structures, utilities, etc., and notify the Owner. Do not resume operation without the Owner’s permission. E. Provide and place bracing and shoring ordered by the Owner when necessary to safeguard adjacent buildings, etc. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly when so ordered, the required bracing and shoring may be placed by order of the Owner at the Contractor’s expense. Any such action shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the bracing and shoring or liability for damage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill Materials: Shall be obtained from excavations on the site, provided the material meets the requirements of the Geotechnical Investigation Report and the Soils Engineer and is approved by the testing lab. Fill material from offsite shall be obtained from borrow pits approved by the testing lab and meeting the requirements of the Soils Engineer. B. Fill Supporting Footings: Well graded granular material, sand or gravel, tested by the testing laboratory. Not more than 10% shall pass #200 sieve; except that fill placed during wet weather or in wet areas shall have no more than 5% passing #200 sieve. Cohesive soils from excavations on the site may be used provided they can be compacted to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. C. Fill under Interior Floor Slabs, UP TO Drainage Course: Granular material of friable earth, or clay of low plasticity, tested by the testing laboratory. D. Drainage Fill Directly under Interior Floor Slabs: Natural hard, clean sand; or naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel or crushed stone acceptable to the Owner's Representative and the testing service. E. Fill Under Concrete Platforms: Granular fill, the same as used for footings.

OEMA-2019-145 EARTHWORK 312000-3 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO F. Other (Ordinary) Backfill and Fill: Reasonably uniform soil materials free of organic or frozen material, debris, trash, and of stones 4" or greater in diameter. Soils from excavations on site may be used provided they can be compacted to the densities specified.

2.02. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Lean Concrete for Use as Structural Fill: Concrete having minimum 28-day strength as recommended by the Geotechnical Report/Soils Engineer or if not recommended, provide minimum 28-day strength of 300-400 psi. B. Filter for Runoff Water at Catch Basins & Manholes: Silt filter meeting DOT requirements of State in which the project resides.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. SITE CLEARING A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that directly interfere with installation of new construction. Remove tree stumps and remove roots projecting above surface of finish grade. 2. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct facilities to be constructed. Do not remove branches and roots for the convenience of construction operations except as approved by Owner for each tree. After cutting branches and roots, immediately apply an approved wound dressing. B. Topsoil Removal: Strip topsoil from areas to be excavated for construction. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. 1. Remove topsoil down to subsoils. 2. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system. 3. Topsoil which has been removed without intermingling with other soils and is reasonably free of clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material, shall be stockpiled for completion of the work. Topsoil not meeting these criteria may only be used for landscape work and shall be stockpiled separately or removed from the site. 4. Construct stockpiles so as to drain precipitation freely. Cover storage piles as required to prevent wind-blown dust and erosion.

3.02. WATER CONTROL A. Grade around excavated areas so as to prevent water from running into trenches, areas for slabs-on- grade and excavations; and grade so as to prevent water from running onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares. B. Keep excavations dry with pumps, piping and temporary drains until backfilling is completed. C. When the earthwork may produce disturbances requiring compliance with a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Storm Water Permit, the Excavation Contractor shall develop a storm water pollution control plan with the cooperation of the Owner (the permittee), using good engineering practices. 1. The plan, when so required, shall identify potential sources of pollution that may be reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge. 2. The plan shall describe practices to reduce pollutants.

312000-4 EARTHWORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 3. The plan shall provide means to ensure that the anti-pollution practices will be implemented and the terms of the permit met. 4. The General Contractor and subcontractors involved in earthwork shall certify that they understand and will comply with all requirements of the permit. 5. A copy of the permit and the certifications shall be kept on-site for inspection upon request. D. Do not discharge drainage water lines into municipal sewers without municipal approval. E. Ensure that water discharge does not contain silt.

3.03. EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate for all work to elevations and dimensions indicated, plus sufficient space to permit erection and installation of forms for footings and foundation walls. 1. Notify testing lab and Owner of all unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work in area until Owner provides notification to resume work. B. All subgrades for footing and building slabs shall be in compliance with the Geotechnical Investigation Report and recommendations of the Soils Engineer and be approved by the soils testing service. Give soils testing service adequate notice as to when excavations are scheduled to reach subgrade elevations shown on Drawings. C. Authorized Additional Excavation: If an unacceptable subgrade material is encountered at the subgrade elevation shown on the Drawings, the Owner may direct the Contractor to excavate to a greater depth by way of Change Order. D. Unauthorized Excavations: If an acceptable subgrade is encountered at the subgrade elevation shown on the Drawings and excavation goes to a greater depth, no additional payment shall be made by the Owner for such excavation nor for backfilling to repair the over excavation. E. Rock Excavation: 1. Definition: Excavation of boulders or pieces of rock, concrete, or masonry measuring more than 1/2 cubic yard; or hard shale or solid ledge rock and masonry requiring continuous use of pneumatic tools or drilling to be removed. 2. Contractor must demonstrate inability to remove by hand pick or by power excavator used for other excavation. Prior to removal, obtain written approval from Owner or Owner's Representative that material to be removed qualifies for extra payment. F. Protect footing and building slab excavations from freezing until excavations are completely backfilled.

3.04. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHING A. General: Excavate for underground utility lines within building. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Trench Dimensions: 1. Cut trenches wide enough to enable proper installation of services, and to allow for inspection. 2. When sheeting and bracing are used, increase trench width accordingly. 3. Do not exceed a trench bottom width of 30 inches at or below top of pipe and inside sheeting and bracing. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 2. Ensure that trenching does not interfere with normal 45° bearing slope of foundation for any structures.

OEMA-2019-145 EARTHWORK 312000-5 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO D. Unsuitable Bearing Soil: 1. Where unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, requiring removal below specified depth, replace material with fill approved by Soils Engineer. E. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. F. Comply with recommendations of Geotechnical Investigation Report and Soils Engineer for installation and protection of utility lines below foundation structures.

3.05. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Bedding (if required): Conform to Municipality Standard Specifications, requirements of Geotechnical Investigation Report and the Soils Engineer’s recommendations. 1. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfilling: 1. Inspection: Do not start backfilling until utility lines are inspected and, if requested by Owner or otherwise required, pressure tested. Ensure that trenches are free of building debris, snow, ice, and water and that ground surfaces are not frozen. 2. Backfilling: Backfill systematically and early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement. 3. Initial Backfill: Place and compact backfill of sand or gravel, as approved by Soils Testing Agency, free of organic materials and free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit, installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches. a. Carefully compact backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. 4. Final Backfill: Above initial backfill, place and compact final backfill of granular material, as approved by Soils Testing Agency, up to grade required for topsoil, installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.

3.06. FILLING AND COMPACTION A. General: 1. Remove all debris from excavations before backfilling. 2. No fill to be compacted shall be placed in free water, or on frozen ground. 3. Manipulate and wet the fill materials as required to obtain uniform moisture content throughout. Fills shall be placed at +2% of the material’s optimum moisture content. 4. Prior to placement of fills under footings, slabs and pavings, the upper 12" of subgrade shall be brought to within 2% of optimum moisture and compacted to not less than 90% per Modified Proctor Method. 5. All subgrades shall be approved by the soils testing service just prior to placement of fills. Should subgrade become frozen, desiccated, saturated or disturbed, remove the affected material, or scarify, moisture condition and recompact the affected materials. Notify soils testing service well ahead of when excavations are scheduled to reach the subgrade elevations required.

312000-6 EARTHWORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 6. Proofroll after placement of fill to verify compliance. B. Placing Fill to be Compacted: 1. Placement: Place fill material in layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, starting in the deepest area and progressing approximately parallel to the finished grade. 2. Testing Between Layers: Compaction of each layer shall be tested as specified. Obtain approval from Soil Engineer before next layer of fill is placed. 3. Drainage Course under Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade: Install a layer of the specified granular fill 6" thick, such that, after compaction, the top of the fill will be at the bottom elevation of the slab as indicated by the Drawings, plus 0", minus 1/2". 4. Fill Under Exterior Platform Slabs: Extend granular fill down to bottom of platform foundation. C. Compaction Procedures: 1. Compact the soils immediately after placement, while they retain their optimum moisture content; otherwise, manipulate and wet the soil as required to obtain the required moisture content uniformly throughout. 2. Suspend compaction operations when proper results cannot be obtained because of rain or soggy conditions, or when other conditions are, in the Soil Engineer’s opinion, unsatisfactory. 3. Compact with vibratory compaction and/or rolling equipment to the specified densities. Compaction by travel of grading equipment will not be considered adequate. Use small vibratory or hand tamping compactors whenever fill is placed adjacent to walls or around footings and columns. 4. Each layer of fill shall be compacted all across its surface to the required density before additional fill may be placed. 5. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, recompact until required density is achieved. D. Minimum Compaction Densities: 1. Granular Fill under Footings, Building Slabs and Exterior Platforms: 95% of maximum density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557). 2. Cohesive Soil Fills within Perimeter of Building Foundations: 95% of maximum laboratory density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557). 3. Fills To Five (5) Feet outside of Building Perimeter: 95% of maximum density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557). E. Replacement of Over-Excavation: 1. Where over-excavation has been authorized, provide approved granular fill to replace the materials excavated from below the designated design subgrade and compact the fill to the required densities. Payment for such additional work will by Change Order. 2. When authorized over-excavation causes the width of the excavation to be increased, fill the excavation to the extended width with the appropriate fill materials and compact the fill to the required densities. Payment for the additional fill work required will be by Change Order. 3. Where over excavation has not been authorized, fill with granular fill compacted to the required density at the required elevation without additional payment.

3.07. ROUGH GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade new filled areas, including adjacent transition areas, and as otherwise indicated within the limits of construction. Include any areas disturbed by construction operations. 1. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerances, with uniform levels of slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.

OEMA-2019-145 EARTHWORK 312000-7 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO 2. The degree of finish required will be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or scraper operations. B. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with the finish surface not more than 0.00' above nor 0.10' below the required subgrade elevation, after compaction, and graded to prevent ponding of water after rains. C. Interior of Building: Rough grade the areas under slabs-on-grade to not less than 6" nor more than 6-1/2", plus the slab thickness, below finish floor line. Grade the surface so as to be free from irregular surface changes.

3.08. MAINTENANCE A. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. B. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. 1. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. 2. Any settlement of areas shall be filled level and smoothed out, and shall be repaired so as to maintain the required grade level for a period of one year.

3.09. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove excavated material unsuitable for fill or backfill from Owner’s property before backfill operations begin. After backfilling is completed, remove from Owner's property all excess fill material. B. Areas under stockpiles not indicated as receiving new construction shall be restored to original condition. C. All off-site hauling shall be in tight beds such as to prevent spilling onto streets or highways. Use drip pans where necessary to prevent spilling. Off-site haul routes shall be approved by the appropriate county and city authorities for disposal of wastes from this contract. D. All excess material removed from site shall become the property of the Contractor. Legally dispose of all materials removed from the site.

END 312000.

312000-8 EARTHWORK OEMA-2019-145 Culver’s Restaurant – Lee’s Summit, MO